This is a modern-English version of The Photoplay: A Psychological Study, originally written by Münsterberg, Hugo. It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling, and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.

Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.

THE PHOTOPLAY

A PSYCHOLOGICAL STUDY

BY

HUGO MÜNSTERBERG


D. APPLETON AND COMPANY

D. Appleton & Company

NEW YORK  LONDON

NEW YORK, LONDON

1916

1916


CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION


INTRODUCTION


CHAPTER I

THE OUTER DEVELOPMENT OF THE MOVING PICTURES

It is arbitrary to say where the development of the moving pictures began and it is impossible to foresee where it will lead. What invention marked the beginning? Was it the first device to introduce movement into the pictures on a screen? Or did the development begin with the first photographing of various phases of moving objects? Or did it start with the first presentation of successive pictures at such a speed that the impression of movement resulted? Or was the birthday of the new art when the experimenters for the first time succeeded in projecting such rapidly passing pictures on a wall? If we think of the moving pictures as a source of entertainment and esthetic enjoyment, we may see the germ in that camera obscura which allowed one glass slide to pass before another and thus showed the railway train on one slide moving over the bridge on the other glass plate. They were popular half a century ago. On the other hand if the essential feature of the moving pictures is the combination of various views into one connected impression, we must look back to the days of the phenakistoscope which had scientific interest only; it is more than eighty years since it was invented. In America, which in most recent times has become the classical land of the moving picture production, the history may be said to begin with the days of the Chicago Exposition, 1893, when Edison exhibited his kinetoscope. The visitor dropped his nickel into a slot, the little motor started, and for half a minute he saw through the magnifying glass a girl dancing or some street boys fighting. Less than a quarter of a century later twenty thousand theaters for moving pictures are open daily in the United States and the millions get for their nickel long hours of enjoyment. In Edison's small box into which only one at a time could peep through the hole, nothing but a few trite scenes were exhibited. In those twenty thousand theaters which grew from it all human passions and emotions find their stage, and whatever history reports or science demonstrates or imagination invents comes to life on the screen of the picture palace.

It's hard to pinpoint exactly when the development of moving pictures started, and we can't predict where it will lead. What invention marked the start? Was it the first device that brought movement to images on a screen? Or did it begin with capturing different phases of moving objects? Or was it when successive images were shown quickly enough to create the illusion of movement? Or did this new art form truly begin when experimenters first projected these fast-moving images onto a wall? If we view moving pictures as a source of entertainment and artistic enjoyment, we might trace its roots back to the camera obscura that allowed one glass slide to move in front of another, showing a train on one slide crossing a bridge on the other. They were popular about fifty years ago. However, if we consider the key feature of moving pictures to be the blending of various views into one coherent impression, we need to look back to the times of the phenakistoscope, which only had scientific interest; it was invented more than eighty years ago. In America, which has recently become the hub for moving picture production, the history can be said to start during the Chicago Exposition of 1893, when Edison showcased his kinetoscope. Visitors would drop a nickel into a slot, the little motor would start, and for thirty seconds they could watch through a magnifying glass as a girl danced or street boys fought. Less than twenty-five years later, there were twenty thousand movie theaters open daily in the United States, giving millions hours of enjoyment for just a nickel. In Edison's small box, which only allowed one person at a time to peek through a hole, there were only a few basic scenes displayed. In those twenty thousand theaters that evolved from it, all of humanity's passions and emotions find their stage, bringing to life whatever history records, science proves, or imagination creates on the screens of movie palaces.

Yet this development from Edison's half-minute show to the "Birth of a Nation" did not proceed on American soil. That slot box, after all, had little chance for popular success. The decisive step was taken when pictures of the Edison type were for the first time thrown on a screen and thus made visible to a large audience. That step was taken 1895 in London. The moving picture theater certainly began in England. But there was one source of the stream springing up in America, which long preceded Edison: the photographic efforts of the Englishman Muybridge, who made his experiments in California as early as 1872. His aim was to have photographs of various phases of a continuous movement, for instance of the different positions which a trotting horse is passing through. His purpose was the analysis of the movement into its component parts, not the synthesis of a moving picture from such parts. Yet it is evident that this too was a necessary step which made the later triumphs possible.

Yet this development from Edison's half-minute show to "Birth of a Nation" didn’t happen in America. That early slot machine, after all, had little chance of becoming popular. The major breakthrough came when images like Edison's were first projected onto a screen, making them visible to a large audience. That happened in 1895 in London. The moving picture theater definitely started in England. However, there was one source of innovation emerging in America that preceded Edison: the photographic work of the Englishman Muybridge, who conducted his experiments in California as early as 1872. His goal was to capture photographs of different phases of continuous motion, such as the various positions a trotting horse goes through. His aim was to analyze movement into its individual components, not to create a moving picture from those parts. Still, it’s clear that this was also a necessary step that made later successes possible.

If we combine the scientific and the artistic efforts of the new and the old world, we may tell the history of the moving pictures by the following dates and achievements. In the year 1825 a Doctor Roget described in the "Philosophical Transactions" an interesting optical illusion of movement, resulting, for instance, when a wheel is moving along behind a fence of upright bars. The discussion was carried much further when it was taken up a few years later by a master of the craft, by Faraday. In the Journal of the Royal Institute of Great Britain he writes in 1831 "on a peculiar class of optical deceptions." He describes there a large number of subtle experiments in which cogwheels of different forms and sizes were revolving with different degrees of rapidity and in different directions. The eye saw the cogs of the moving rear wheel through the passing cogs of the front wheel. The result is the appearance of movement effects which do not correspond to an objective motion. The impression of backward movement can arise from forward motions, quick movement from slow, complete rest from combinations of movements. For the first time the impression of movement was synthetically produced from different elements. For those who fancy that the "new psychology" with its experimental analysis of psychological experiences began only in the second half of the nineteenth century or perhaps even with the foundation of the psychological laboratories, it might be enlightening to study those discussions of the early thirties.

If we combine the scientific and artistic efforts from both the new and old worlds, we can chronicle the history of moving pictures through the following dates and achievements. In 1825, a Doctor Roget described an interesting optical illusion of movement in the "Philosophical Transactions," which occurs when a wheel moves behind a fence of upright bars. A few years later, the discussion was advanced by Faraday, a master of the craft. In the Journal of the Royal Institute of Great Britain, he wrote in 1831 about a peculiar class of optical deceptions. He detailed a variety of subtle experiments where cogwheels of different shapes and sizes were turning at various speeds and directions. The eye perceives the cogs of the moving rear wheel through the passing cogs of the front wheel. This creates an illusion of movement effects that don't match any actual motion. The impression of backward movement can appear from forward motions, quick movement can be perceived from slow movement, and complete stillness can arise from combinations of movements. For the first time, the impression of movement was synthetically created from different elements. For those who think that the "new psychology" with its experimental analysis of psychological experiences only started in the second half of the nineteenth century or perhaps with the establishment of psychological laboratories, it could be insightful to examine the discussions from the early thirties.

The next step leads us much further. In the fall of 1832 Stampfer in Germany and Plateau in France, independent of each other, at the same time designed a device by which pictures of objects in various phases of movement give the impression of continued motion. Both secured the effect by cutting fine slits in a black disk in the direction of the radius. When the disk is revolved around its center, these slits pass the eye of the observer. If he holds it before a mirror and on the rear side of the disk pictures are drawn corresponding to the various slits, the eye will see one picture after another in rapid succession at the same place. If these little pictures give us the various stages of a movement, for instance a wheel with its spokes in different positions, the whole series of impressions will be combined into the perception of a revolving wheel. Stampfer called them the stroboscopic disks, Plateau the phenakistoscope. The smaller the slits, the sharper the pictures. Uchatius in Vienna constructed an apparatus as early as 1853 to throw these pictures of the stroboscopic disks on the wall. Horner followed with the daedaleum, in which the disk was replaced by a hollow cylinder which had the pictures on the inside and holes to watch them from without while the cylinder was in rotation. From this was developed the popular toy which as the zoötrope or bioscope became familiar everywhere. It was a revolving black cylinder with vertical slits, on the inside of which paper strips with pictures of moving objects in successive phases were placed. The clowns sprang through the hoop and repeated this whole movement with every new revolution of the cylinder. In more complex instruments three sets of slits were arranged above one another. One set corresponded exactly to the distances of the pictures and the result was that the moving object appeared to remain on the same spot. The second brought the slits nearer together; then the pictures necessarily produced an effect as if the man were really moving forward while he performed his tricks. In the third set the slits were further distant from one another than the pictures, and the result was that the picture moved backward.

The next step takes us much further. In the fall of 1832, Stampfer in Germany and Plateau in France, independently and simultaneously, designed a device that creates the illusion of continuous motion by displaying images of objects in different phases of movement. They achieved this effect by cutting fine slits in a black disk along the radius. When the disk spins around its center, these slits pass in front of the observer's eyes. If the observer holds it in front of a mirror and draws images corresponding to the slits on the back of the disk, the eye will see one image after another in quick succession at the same spot. If these little images represent different stages of a movement, like a wheel with spokes in different positions, the entire series of impressions will blend into the perception of a spinning wheel. Stampfer named them stroboscopic disks, while Plateau called them the phenakistoscope. The smaller the slits, the clearer the images. Uchatius in Vienna created a device as early as 1853 to project these images from the stroboscopic disks onto a wall. Horner then developed the daedaleum, replacing the disk with a hollow cylinder that had images on the inside and openings to view them from the outside while the cylinder spun. This eventually led to the popular toy known as the zoëtrope or bioscope, which became widely recognized. It was a rotating black cylinder with vertical slits, containing paper strips with images of moving objects in sequential phases. The clowns would jump through the hoop, repeating their entire movement with each revolution of the cylinder. In more advanced devices, three sets of slits were arranged one above the other. One set exactly matched the distances of the images, causing the moving object to appear to stay in the same spot. The second set spaced the slits closer together, giving the illusion that the figure was genuinely moving forward while performing tricks. The third set had the slits spaced further apart than the images, resulting in the picture appearing to move backward.

The scientific principle which controls the moving picture world of today was established with these early devices. Isolated pictures presented to the eye in rapid succession but separated by interruptions are perceived not as single impressions of different positions, but as a continuous movement. But the pictures of movements used so far were drawn by the pen of the artist. Life showed to him everywhere continuous movements; his imagination had to resolve them into various instantaneous positions. He drew the horse race for the zoötrope, but while the horses moved forward, nobody was able to say whether the various pictures of their legs really corresponded to the stages of the actual movements. Thus a true development of the stroboscopic effects appeared dependent upon the fixation of the successive stages. This was secured in the early seventies, but to make this progress possible the whole wonderful unfolding of the photographer's art was needed, from the early daguerreotype, which presupposed hours of exposure, to the instantaneous photograph which fixes the picture of the outer world in a small fraction of a second. We are not concerned here with this technical advance, with the perfection of the sensitive surface of the photographic plate. In 1872 the photographer's camera had reached a stage at which it was possible to take snapshot pictures. But this alone would not have allowed the photographing of a real movement with one camera, as the plates could not have been exchanged quickly enough to catch the various phases of a short motion.

The scientific principle that shapes today’s movie world was established with these early devices. Isolated images shown to the eye in quick succession, but interrupted, are perceived not as separate impressions of different positions, but as a continuous motion. However, the movement images used until now were created by the artist's hand. Life showed him continuous movements everywhere; his imagination had to break them down into various instant positions. He illustrated the horse race for the zoötrope, but while the horses moved forward, no one could say if the various images of their legs accurately reflected the stages of the actual movements. Thus, a true development of the stroboscopic effects relied on capturing the successive stages. This was achieved in the early seventies, but making this progress possible required the entire fantastic evolution of photography, from the early daguerreotype, which needed hours of exposure, to the instantaneous photograph that captures the external world in a fraction of a second. We’re not focusing on this technical advancement, nor the refinement of the photographic plate’s sensitive surface. By 1872, the photographer's camera had reached a point where it was possible to take snapshot pictures. But this alone wouldn’t have permitted the capturing of real movement with one camera, as the plates couldn’t be changed quickly enough to capture the various phases of a brief motion.

Here the work of Muybridge sets in. He had a black horse trot or gallop or walk before a white wall, passing twenty-four cameras. On the path of the horse were twenty-four threads which the horse broke one after another and each one released the spring which opened the shutter of an instrument. The movement of the horse was thus analyzed into twenty-four pictures of successive phases; and for the first time the human eye saw the actual positions of a horse's legs during the gallop or trot. It is not surprising that these pictures of Muybridge interested the French painters when he came to Paris, but fascinated still more the great student of animal movements, the physiologist Marey. He had contributed to science many an intricate apparatus for the registration of movement processes. "Marey's tambour" is still the most useful instrument in every physiological and psychological laboratory, whenever slight delicate movements are to be recorded. The movement of a bird's wings interested him especially, and at his suggestion Muybridge turned to the study of the flight of birds. Flying pigeons were photographed in different positions, each picture taken in a five-hundredth part of a second.

Here’s where Muybridge’s work comes in. He had a black horse trot, gallop, or walk in front of a white wall, passing twenty-four cameras. Along the horse’s path were twenty-four threads that the horse broke one after another, and each break released a spring that opened the shutter of a camera. The horse's movement was analyzed into twenty-four images showing successive phases; for the first time, the human eye could see the actual positions of a horse's legs during a gallop or trot. It's no surprise that these images intrigued French painters when Muybridge visited Paris, but they captured the attention even more of the great researcher of animal movements, the physiologist Marey. He had created many complex devices for recording movement processes. "Marey's tambour" remains the most useful tool in physiological and psychological labs when it comes to recording subtle movements. He was particularly interested in the movement of bird wings, and at his suggestion, Muybridge began studying the flight of birds. Flying pigeons were photographed in various positions, with each shot taken in just one five-hundredth of a second.

But Marey himself improved the method. He made use of an idea which the astronomer Jannsen had applied to the photographing of astronomical processes. Jannsen photographed, for instance, the transit of the planet Venus across the sun in December, 1874, on a circular sensitized plate which revolved in the camera. The plate moved forward a few degrees every minute. There was room in this way to have eighteen pictures of different phases of the transit on the marginal part of the one plate. Marey constructed the apparatus for the revolving disk so that the intervals instead of a full minute became only one-twelfth of a second. On the one revolving disk twenty-five views of the bird in motion could be taken. This brings us to the time of the early eighties. Marey remained indefatigable in improving the means for quick successive snapshots with the same camera. Human beings were photographed by him in white clothes on a black background. When ten pictures were taken in a second the subtlest motions in their jumping or running could be disentangled. The leading aim was still decidedly a scientific understanding of the motions, and the combination of the pictures into a unified impression of movement was not the purpose. Least of all was mere amusement intended.

But Marey himself enhanced the method. He utilized an idea that the astronomer Jannsen had applied to photograph astronomical events. For example, Jannsen photographed the transit of Venus across the sun in December 1874 on a circular sensitized plate that revolved in the camera. The plate advanced a few degrees every minute. This setup allowed for eighteen images of different phases of the transit to be captured on the edge of a single plate. Marey designed the apparatus for the rotating disk to reduce the intervals from a full minute to just one-twelfth of a second. With one rotating disk, twenty-five views of a bird in motion could be recorded. This brings us to the early 1880s. Marey tirelessly worked to enhance the methods for rapid successive snapshots with the same camera. He photographed people dressed in white against a black background. When ten images were taken in a second, the tiniest motions of their jumping or running could be analyzed. The main goal was still clearly to achieve a scientific understanding of movements, and combining the images into a cohesive representation of motion was not the intent. Least of all was mere entertainment intended.

About that time Anschütz in Germany followed the Muybridge suggestions with much success and gave to this art of photographing the movement of animals and men a new turn. He not only photographed the successive stages, but printed them on a long strip which was laid around a horizontal wheel. This wheel is in a dark box and the eye can see the pictures on the paper strip only at the moment when the light of a Geissler's tube flashes up. The wheel itself has such electric contacts that the intervals between two flashes correspond to the time which is necessary to move the wheel from one picture to the next. However quickly the wheel may be revolved the lights follow one another with the same rapidity with which the pictures replace one another. During the movement when one picture moves away and another approaches the center of vision all is dark. Hence the eye does not see the changes but gets an impression as if the picture remained at the same spot, only moving. The bird flaps its wings and the horse trots. It was really a perfect kinetoscopic instrument. Yet its limitations were evident. No movements could be presented but simple rhythmical ones, inasmuch as after one revolution of the wheel the old pictures returned. The marching men appeared very lifelike; yet they could not do anything but march on and on, the circumference of the wheel not allowing more room than was needed for about forty stages of the moving legs from the beginning to the end of the step.

Around that time, Anschütz in Germany took Muybridge's ideas and ran with them, achieving great success and giving a fresh perspective to the art of capturing the movement of animals and people. He didn’t just photograph the individual stages; he printed them on a long strip that he wrapped around a horizontal wheel. This wheel is placed inside a dark box, and you can only see the images on the paper strip when the light from a Geissler's tube flashes on. The wheel itself has electric contacts so that the pauses between two flashes match the time it takes to move the wheel from one image to the next. No matter how fast the wheel spins, the lights flash in sync with the images swapping places. When one picture moves out of view and another comes into focus, everything goes dark. As a result, the eye doesn’t notice the transitions but perceives the image as if it stays in the same spot, only in motion. The bird flaps its wings, and the horse trots. It was a remarkable kinetoscopic device. However, its limitations were clear. Only simple rhythmic movements could be shown since after one complete turn of the wheel, the old images would reappear. The marching figures looked very lifelike, yet they could only keep marching; the wheel’s design only accommodated around forty positions of the moving legs from the start to the finish of a step.

If the picture of a motion was to go beyond these simplest rhythmical movements, if persons in action were really to be shown, it would be necessary to have a much larger number of pictures in instantaneous illumination. The wheel principle would have to be given up and a long strip with pictures would be needed. That presupposed a correspondingly long set of exposures and this demand could not be realized as long as the pictures were taken on glass plates. But in that period experiments were undertaken on many sides to substitute a more flexible transparent material for the glass. Translucent papers, gelatine, celluloid, and other substances were tried. It is well known that the invention which was decisive was the film which Eastman in Rochester produced. With it came the great mechanical improvement, the use of the two rollers. One roller holds the long strip of film which is slowly wound over the second, the device familiar to every amateur photographer today. With film photography was gained the possibility not only of securing a much larger number of pictures than Marey or Anschütz made with their circular arrangements, but of having these pictures pass before the eye illumined by quickly succeeding flashlights for any length of time. Moreover, instead of the quick illumination the passing pictures might be constantly lighted. In that case slits must pass by in the opposite direction so that each picture is seen for a moment only, as if it were at rest. This idea is perfectly realized in Edison's machine.

If the image of motion is to go beyond these basic rhythmic movements and truly show people in action, a much larger number of pictures with instant illumination would be necessary. We would need to abandon the wheel principle and instead use a long strip with pictures. This would require a correspondingly long set of exposures, which wasn’t feasible as long as the pictures were taken on glass plates. During that time, experiments were conducted on various fronts to find a more flexible transparent material to replace glass. They tried translucent papers, gelatine, celluloid, and other substances. The decisive invention was the film created by Eastman in Rochester. With it came a major mechanical improvement: the use of two rollers. One roller holds the long strip of film that slowly winds over the second roller, a mechanism that's familiar to every amateur photographer today. With film, it became possible to capture a much larger number of pictures than Marey or Anschütz could with their circular setups, and these pictures could be shown before the eye, illuminated by rapidly succeeding flashlights for any length of time. Additionally, instead of quick flashes, the passing pictures could be constantly lit. In that case, slits would have to move in the opposite direction so that each picture is seen for just a moment, as if it were still. This concept is perfectly realized in Edison’s machine.

In Edison's kinetoscope a strip of celluloid film forty-five feet in length with a series of pictures each three-quarters of an inch long moved continuously over a series of rolls. The pictures passed a magnifying lens, but between the lens and the picture was a revolving shutter which moved with a speed carefully adjusted to the film. The opening in the shutter was opposite the lens at the moment when the film had moved on three-quarters of an inch. Hence the eye saw not the passing of the pictures but one picture after another at the same spot. Pretty little scenes could now be acted in half a minute's time, as more than six hundred pictures could be used. The first instrument was built in 1890, and soon after the Chicago World's Fair it was used for entertainment all over the world. The wheel of Anschütz had been widespread too; yet it was considered only as a half-scientific apparatus. With Edison's kinetoscope the moving pictures had become a means for popular amusement and entertainment, and the appetite of commercialism was whetted. At once efforts to improve on the Edison machine were starting everywhere, and the adjustment to the needs of the wide public was in the foreground.

In Edison's kinetoscope, a 45-foot strip of celluloid film featured a series of images, each three-quarters of an inch long, that moved continuously over a series of rollers. The images passed a magnifying lens, but between the lens and the images was a revolving shutter that moved at a speed precisely matched to the film. The opening in the shutter aligned with the lens when the film had advanced three-quarters of an inch. As a result, the viewer saw not the rapid succession of images but one image appearing after another at the same spot. Charming little scenes could now be performed in half a minute since more than 600 images could be used. The initial device was created in 1890, and shortly after the Chicago World's Fair, it was being used for entertainment worldwide. The Anschütz wheel had also been popular, but it was viewed mainly as a semi-scientific device. With Edison's kinetoscope, moving pictures became a source of popular entertainment, sparking interest from commercial ventures. Immediately, efforts to enhance the Edison machine began springing up everywhere, with a focus on catering to the demands of the general public.

Crowning success came almost at the same time to Lumière and Son in Paris and to Paul in London. They recognized clearly that the new scheme could not become really profitable on a large scale as long as only one person at a time could see the pictures. Both the well-known French manufacturers of photographic supplies and the English engineer considered the next step necessary to be the projection of the films upon a large screen. Yet this involved another fundamental change. In the kinetoscope the films passed by continuously. The time of the exposure through the opening in the revolving shutter had to be extremely short in order to give distinct pictures. The slightest lengthening would make the movement of the film itself visible and produce a blurring effect. This time was sufficient for the seeing of the picture; it could not be sufficient for the greatly enlarged view on the wall. Too little light passed through to give a distinct image. Hence it became essential to transform the continuous movement of the film into an intermittent one. The strip of film must be drawn before the lens by jerking movements so that the real motion of the strip would occur in the periods in which the shutter was closed, while it was at rest for the fraction of time in which the light of the projection apparatus passed through.

Crowning success came almost at the same time to Lumière and Son in Paris and to Paul in London. They clearly understood that the new plan couldn't really become profitable on a large scale as long as only one person at a time could watch the pictures. Both the well-known French manufacturers of photographic supplies and the English engineer saw that the next necessary step was to project the films onto a large screen. However, this required another fundamental change. In the kinetoscope, the films moved continuously. The exposure time through the opening in the revolving shutter had to be extremely short to produce clear pictures. Even a slight increase in exposure would make the movement of the film itself visible and cause a blurring effect. This time was enough for viewing the picture; it wasn't enough for the much larger display on the wall. Not enough light passed through to create a clear image. Therefore, it became essential to change the film's continuous movement into an intermittent one. The strip of film needed to be pulled in front of the lens with quick movements so that the actual motion of the strip would happen during the times when the shutter was closed, while it was still for the brief moments when the light from the projection device shone through.

Both Lumière and Paul overcame this difficulty and secured an intermittent pushing forward of the pictures for three-quarters of an inch, that is for the length of the single photograph. In the spring of 1895 Paul's theatrograph or animatograph was completed, and in the following year he began his engagement at the Alhambra Theater, where the novelty was planned as a vaudeville show for a few days but stayed for many a year, since it proved at once an unprecedented success. The American field was conquered by the Lumière camera. The Eden Musée was the first place where this French kinematograph was installed. The enjoyment which today one hundred and twenty-five thousand moving picture theaters all over the globe bring to thirty million people daily is dependent upon Lumière's and Paul's invention. The improvements in the technique of taking the pictures and of projecting them on the screen are legion, but the fundamental features have not been changed. Yes; on the whole the development of the last two decades has been a conservative one. The fact that every producer tries to distribute his films to every country forces a far-reaching standardization on the entire moving picture world. The little pictures on the film are still today exactly the same size as those which Edison used for his kinetoscope and the long strips of film are still gauged by four round perforations at the side of each to catch the sprockets which guide the film.

Both Lumière and Paul managed to get past this challenge and enabled the pictures to move intermittently forward by three-quarters of an inch, which is the length of a single photograph. In the spring of 1895, Paul’s theatrograph or animatograph was finished, and the following year he started performing at the Alhambra Theater, where what was initially planned as a short vaudeville show ended up running for many years, because it turned out to be an unprecedented success. The American market was captured by the Lumière camera. The Eden Musée was the first venue to install this French kinematograph. The enjoyment that today one hundred twenty-five thousand movie theaters around the world provide to thirty million people daily relies on Lumière’s and Paul’s invention. While there have been numerous advancements in the techniques for capturing and projecting images, the fundamental features have remained unchanged. Overall, the development over the last two decades has been relatively conservative. The fact that every producer aims to distribute their films worldwide has led to a significant standardization across the entire film industry. The tiny images on the film are still exactly the same size as those used by Edison for his kinetoscope, and the long strips of film are still measured with four round perforations on the side of each to engage the sprockets that guide the film.

As soon as the moving picture show had become a feature of the vaudeville theater, the longing of the crowd for ever new entertainments and sensations had to be satisfied if the success was to last. The mere enjoyment of the technical wonder as such necessarily faded away and the interest could be kept up only if the scenes presented on the screen became themselves more and more enthralling. The trivial acts played in less than a minute without any artistic setting and without any rehearsal or preparation soon became unsatisfactory. The grandmother who washes the baby and even the street boy who plays a prank had to be replaced by quick little comedies. Stages were set up; more and more elaborate scenes were created; the film grew and grew in length. Competing companies in France and later in the United States, England, Germany and notably in Italy developed more and more ambitious productions. As early as 1898 the Eden Musée in New York produced an elaborate setting of the Passion Play in nearly fifty thousand pictures, which needed almost an hour for production. The personnel on the stage increased rapidly, huge establishments in which any scenery could be built up sprang into being. But the inclosed scene was often not a sufficient background; the kinematographic camera was brought to mountains and seashore, and soon to the jungles of Africa or to Central Asia if the photoplay demanded exciting scenes on picturesque backgrounds. Thousands of people entered into the battle scenes which the historical drama demanded. We stand today in the midst of this external growth of which no one dreamed in the days of the kinetoscope. Yet this technical progress and this tremendous increase of the mechanical devices for production have their true meaning in the inner growth which led from trite episodes to the height of tremendous action, from trivial routine to a new and most promising art.

As soon as movies became a part of vaudeville theater, the audience's desire for fresh entertainment and experiences needed to be met for success to continue. The initial thrill of the technical marvel eventually wore off, and keeping interest alive required increasingly captivating scenes on screen. The simple acts that lasted less than a minute, lacking any artistic setup and without rehearsal or preparation, quickly became inadequate. The grandmother washing the baby and the street kid playing pranks needed to be replaced by quick, engaging comedies. Stages were built; more elaborate scenes were created; films began to grow longer. Competing companies in France and later in the United States, England, Germany, and especially Italy began producing more ambitious works. By 1898, the Eden Musée in New York showcased an intricate version of the Passion Play with nearly fifty thousand pictures, which took almost an hour to present. The number of performers on stage grew quickly, leading to the establishment of huge facilities where any scenery could be constructed. However, these enclosed settings often weren't enough; the movie camera was taken to mountains and coastlines, and soon to the jungles of Africa or Central Asia whenever the screenplay called for thrilling scenes against beautiful backdrops. Thousands of people were involved in the battle scenes required for historical dramas. Today, we find ourselves in the midst of this expansion that no one envisioned back in the days of the kinetoscope. Yet, this technical advancement and the remarkable increase in mechanical production devices hold true significance in the internal development that progressed from mundane episodes to intense action, from dull routines to a new and most promising art.


CHAPTER II

THE INNER DEVELOPMENT OF THE MOVING PICTURES

It was indeed not an external technical advance only which led from Edison's half a minute show of the little boy who turns on the hose to the "Daughter of Neptune," or "Quo Vadis," or "Cabiria," and many another performance which fills an evening. The advance was first of all internal; it was an esthetic idea. Yet even this does not tell the whole story of the inner growth of the moving pictures, as it points only to the progress of the photoplay. It leaves out of account the fact that the moving pictures appeal not merely to the imagination, but that they bring their message also to the intellect. They aim toward instruction and information. Just as between the two covers of a magazine artistic stories stand side by side with instructive essays, scientific articles, or discussions of the events of the day, the photoplay is accompanied by a kinematoscopic rendering of reality in all its aspects. Whatever in nature or in social life interests the human understanding or human curiosity comes to the mind of the spectator with an incomparable intensity when not a lifeless photograph but a moving picture brings it to the screen.

It wasn't just a technical breakthrough that transformed Edison's brief clip of a little boy turning on a hose into grand productions like "Daughter of Neptune," "Quo Vadis," or "Cabiria," among many others that fill our evenings. The key advancement was internal; it was an artistic concept. However, this only partially explains the inner development of films, as it focuses solely on the evolution of storytelling. It overlooks the fact that movies engage not only the imagination but also address the intellect. They aim to educate and inform. Just like how artistic tales are published alongside informative essays, scientific articles, or discussions of current events within the pages of a magazine, films are complemented by a kinematoscopic portrayal of reality in all its forms. Anything in nature or social life that piques human interest or curiosity resonates with viewers far more powerfully when it's presented as a moving picture rather than a static photo.

The happenings of the day afford the most convenient material, as they offer the chance for constantly changing programmes and hence the ideal conditions for a novelty seeking public. No actors are needed; the dramatic interest is furnished by the political and social importance of the events. In the early days when the great stages for the production of photoplays had not been built, the moving picture industry relied in a much higher degree than today on this supply from the surrounding public life. But while the material was abundant, it soon became rather insipid to see parades and processions and orators, and even where the immediate interest seemed to give value to the pictures it was for the most part only a local interest and faded away after a time. The coronation of the king or the inauguration of the president, the earthquake in Sicily, the great Derby, come, after all, too seldom. Moreover through the strong competition only the first comer gained the profits and only the most sensational dashes of kinematographers with the reporter's instinct could lead to success in the eyes of the spoiled moving picture audiences.

The events of the day provide the most convenient material, as they offer the opportunity for constantly changing programs and, therefore, the ideal conditions for a public seeking novelty. No actors are needed; the dramatic interest comes from the political and social significance of the events. In the early days, when major stages for film productions hadn’t been built, the moving picture industry relied much more than today on this supply from the surrounding public life. But while the material was abundant, it quickly became quite dull to watch parades, processions, and speakers, and even where the immediate interest seemed to add value to the footage, it was mostly just local interest that faded away over time. Events like the king's coronation or the president's inauguration, or the earthquake in Sicily, or the big derby, happen way too infrequently. Plus, due to intense competition, only the first ones to capture these events reaped the benefits, and only the most sensational stunts by filmmakers with a reporter's instinct could lead to success in the eyes of today's jaded movie audiences.

Certainly the history of these enterprises is full of adventures worthy to rank with the most daring feats in the newspaper world. We hear that when the investiture of the Prince of Wales was performed at Carnarvon at four o'clock in the afternoon, the public of London at ten o'clock of the same day saw the ceremony on the screen in a moving picture twelve minutes in length. The distance between the two places is two hundred miles. The film was seven hundred and fifty feet long. It had been developed and printed in a special express train made up of long freight cars transformed into dark rooms and fitted with tanks for the developing and washing and with a machine for printing and drying. Yet on the whole the current events were slowly losing ground even in Europe, while America had never given such a large share of interest to this rival of the newspaper. It is claimed that the producers in America disliked these topical pictures because the accidental character of the events makes the production irregular and interferes too much with the steady preparation of the photoplays. Only when the war broke out, the great wave of excitement swept away this apathy. The pictures from the trenches, the marches of the troops, the life of the prisoners, the movements of the leaders, the busy life behind the front, and the action of the big guns absorbed the popular interest in every corner of the world. While the picturesque old-time war reporter has almost disappeared, the moving picture man has inherited all his courage, patience, sensationalism, and spirit of adventure.

Certainly, the history of these ventures is filled with adventures that could easily stand alongside the boldest feats in the newspaper industry. We learn that when the Prince of Wales was officially invested in Carnarvon at four o'clock in the afternoon, the public in London was able to see the ceremony on screen just six hours later, in a twelve-minute moving picture. The distance between the two locations is two hundred miles. The film was seven hundred and fifty feet long. It had been developed and printed in a special express train that was converted from freight cars into dark rooms, equipped with tanks for developing and washing, as well as a machine for printing and drying. Yet, overall, current events were slowly losing traction even in Europe, while America had never shown as much interest in this competitor to newspapers. It’s said that American producers were not fans of these timely pictures because the unpredictable nature of the events made production irregular and disrupted the consistent preparation of films. Only when the war broke out did the overwhelming wave of excitement break through this indifference. The images from the trenches, the troops in march, the lives of prisoners, the actions of leaders, the bustling life behind the lines, and the impact of the big guns captured public interest everywhere. While the colorful old-school war reporter has nearly vanished, the moving picture filmmaker has taken on all their courage, patience, sensationalism, and spirit of adventure.

A greater photographic achievement, however, than the picturing of the social and historic events was the marvelous success of the kinematograph with the life of nature. No explorer in recent years has crossed distant lands and seas without a kinematographic outfit. We suddenly looked into the most intimate life of the African wilderness. There the elephants and giraffes and monkeys passed to the waterhole, not knowing that the moving picture man was turning his crank in the top of a tree. We followed Scott and Shackleton into the regions of eternal ice, we climbed the Himalayas, we saw the world from the height of the aëroplane, and every child in Europe knows now the wonders of Niagara. But the kinematographer has not sought nature only where it is gigantic or strange; he follows its path with no less admirable effect when it is idyllic. The brook in the woods, the birds in their nest, the flowers trembling in the wind have brought their charm to the delighted eye more and more with the progress of the new art.

A bigger photographic achievement, however, than capturing social and historical events was the incredible success of the motion picture in showcasing the beauty of nature. No explorer in recent years has traveled to distant lands and seas without a film crew. We suddenly got an up-close look at the intimate life of the African wilderness. There, the elephants, giraffes, and monkeys made their way to the waterhole, unaware that the cameraman was filming from the top of a tree. We followed Scott and Shackleton into the land of eternal ice, we climbed the Himalayas, we viewed the world from the height of an airplane, and every child in Europe now knows the wonders of Niagara. But the filmmaker hasn't just captured nature where it is gigantic or unusual; he follows its path with just as much impressive effect when it's serene. The brook in the woods, the birds in their nests, the flowers swaying in the wind have enchanted viewers more and more as this new art form has progressed.

But the wonders of nature which the camera unveils to us are not limited to those which the naked eye can follow. The technical progress led to the attachment of the microscope. After overcoming tremendous difficulties, the scientists succeeded in developing a microscope kinematography which multiplies the dimensions a hundred thousand times. We may see on the screen the fight of the bacteria with the microscopically small blood corpuscles in the blood stream of a diseased animal. Yes, by the miracles of the camera we may trace the life of nature even in forms which no human observation really finds in the outer world. Out there it may take weeks for the orchid to bud and blossom and fade; in the picture the process passes before us in a few seconds. We see how the caterpillar spins its cocoon and how it breaks it and how the butterfly unfolds its wings; and all which needed days and months goes on in a fraction of a minute. New interest for geography and botany and zoölogy has thus been aroused by these developments, undreamed of in the early days of the kinematograph, and the scientists themselves have through this new means of technique gained unexpected help for their labors.

But the wonders of nature that the camera reveals to us go beyond what the naked eye can see. Advances in technology led to the introduction of the microscope. After overcoming significant challenges, scientists developed microscope kinematography that magnifies dimensions a hundred thousand times. We can watch on screen the battle between bacteria and tiny blood cells in the bloodstream of a sick animal. Yes, through the miracles of the camera, we can observe the life of nature in forms that no human eye can notice in the outside world. Out there, it may take weeks for an orchid to bud, bloom, and wither; but in the film, that process unfolds in just a few seconds. We see how a caterpillar spins its cocoon, breaks free, and how the butterfly opens its wings; everything that normally takes days and months happens in a fraction of a minute. These developments have sparked new interest in geography, botany, and zoology—advances unimaginable in the early days of the kinematograph—and scientists have found unexpected assistance in their work through this new technology.

The last achievement in this universe of photoknowledge is "the magazine on the screen." It is a bold step which yet seemed necessary in our day of rapid kinematoscopic progress. The popular printed magazines in America had their heydey in the muckraking period about ten years ago. Their hold on the imagination of the public which wants to be informed and entertained at the same time has steadily decreased, while the power of the moving picture houses has increased. The picture house ought therefore to take up the task of the magazines which it has partly displaced. The magazines give only a small place to the news of the day, a larger place to articles in which scholars and men of public life discuss significant problems. Much American history in the last two decades was deeply influenced by the columns of the illustrated magazines. Those men who reached the millions by such articles cannot overlook the fact—they may approve or condemn it—that the masses of today prefer to be taught by pictures rather than by words. The audiences are assembled anyhow. Instead of feeding them with mere entertainment, why not give them food for serious thought? It seemed therefore a most fertile idea when the "Paramount Pictograph" was founded to carry intellectual messages and ambitious discussions into the film houses. Political and economic, social and hygienic, technical and industrial, esthetic and scientific questions can in no way be brought nearer to the grasp of millions. The editors will have to take care that the discussions do not degenerate into one-sided propaganda, but so must the editors of a printed magazine. Among the scientists the psychologist may have a particular interest in this latest venture of the film world. The screen ought to offer a unique opportunity to interest wide circles in psychological experiments and mental tests and in this way to spread the knowledge of their importance for vocational guidance and the practical affairs of life.

The latest achievement in this world of photoknowledge is "the magazine on the screen." It's a bold move that feels necessary in our fast-paced era of cinematic progress. Printed magazines in America peaked during the muckraking period about ten years ago. Their grip on the public's imagination, which craves both information and entertainment, has steadily declined, while the influence of movie theaters has surged. Therefore, the cinema should take on the role of the magazines it has partially displaced. Magazines provide only a small amount of current news and a larger space for articles where scholars and public figures discuss important issues. Much of American history over the past two decades has been significantly shaped by the columns of illustrated magazines. Those who reached millions through such articles cannot ignore the reality—that today’s masses prefer to learn through images rather than text. The audiences are there regardless. Instead of just entertaining them, why not provide them with material for serious reflection? It was, therefore, a brilliant idea when the "Paramount Pictograph" was created to deliver intellectual messages and serious discussions to movie theaters. Political, economic, social, health, technical, industrial, aesthetic, and scientific topics can be made more accessible to millions. Editors must ensure that discussions don’t turn into one-sided propaganda, just like editors of traditional magazines must. Among scientists, psychologists may find particular interest in this new endeavor in film. The screen should present a unique chance to engage a wide audience in psychological experiments and mental tests, spreading awareness of their significance for career guidance and practical life.

Yet that power of the moving pictures to supplement the school room and the newspaper and the library by spreading information and knowledge is, after all, secondary to their general task, to bring entertainment and amusement to the masses. This is the chief road on which the forward march of the last twenty years has been most rapid. The theater and the vaudeville and the novel had to yield room and ample room to the play of the flitting pictures. What was the real principle of the inner development on this artistic side? The little scenes which the first pictures offered could hardly have been called plays. They would have been unable to hold the attention by their own contents. Their only charm was really the pleasure in the perfection with which the apparatus rendered the actual movements. But soon touching episodes were staged, little humorous scenes or melodramatic actions were played before the camera, and the same emotions stirred which up to that time only the true theater play had awakened. The aim seemed to be to have a real substitute for the stage. The most evident gain of this new scheme was the reduction of expenses. One actor is now able to entertain many thousand audiences at the same time, one stage setting is sufficient to give pleasure to millions. The theater can thus be democratized. Everybody's purse allows him to see the greatest artists and in every village a stage can be set up and the joy of a true theater performance can be spread to the remotest corner of the lands. Just as the graphophone can multiply without limit the music of the concert hall, the singer, and the orchestra, so, it seemed, would the photoplay reproduce the theater performance without end.

Yet the power of moving pictures to enhance the classroom, newspapers, and libraries by spreading information and knowledge is, ultimately, secondary to their main goal: to provide entertainment and enjoyment for the masses. This has been the primary path of rapid progress over the last twenty years. The theater, vaudeville, and novels had to make way for the captivating allure of moving images. What was the real principle behind this artistic evolution? The short scenes presented by the earliest films could barely be considered plays. They wouldn't have captured attention based solely on their content. Their appeal came from the impressive precision with which the technology depicted actual movement. But soon, touching stories were filmed, humorous sketches or melodramatic actions were performed in front of the camera, stirring emotions that previously only true theater could evoke. The goal seemed to be creating a genuine substitute for the stage. The most obvious advantage of this new approach was the significant reduction in costs. One actor can now entertain thousands of audiences simultaneously, and a single stage setup can delight millions. The theater can thus become more accessible. Everyone can afford to see the greatest artists, and stages can be set up in every village, bringing the joy of true theater performances to even the most remote areas. Just as the gramophone can endlessly reproduce the music of the concert hall, the singer, and the orchestra, it seemed that the photoplay would endlessly replicate theater performances.

Of course, the substitute could not be equal to the original. The color was lacking, the real depth of the objective stage was missing, and above all the spoken word had been silenced. The few interspersed descriptive texts, the so-called "leaders," had to hint at that which in the real drama the speeches of the actors explain and elaborate. It was thus surely only the shadow of a true theater, different not only as a photograph is compared with a painting, but different as a photograph is compared with the original man. And yet, however meager and shadowlike the moving picture play appeared compared with the performance of living actors, the advantage of the cheap multiplication was so great that the ambition of the producers was natural, to go forward from the little playlets to great dramas which held the attention for hours. The kinematographic theater soon had its Shakespeare repertoire; Ibsen has been played and the dramatized novels on the screen became legion. Victor Hugo and Dickens scored new triumphs. In a few years the way from the silly trite practical joke to Hamlet and Peer Gynt was covered with such thoroughness that the possibility of giving a photographic rendering of any thinkable theater performance was proven for all time.

Of course, the substitute could never match the original. The color was off, the true depth of the stage was missing, and most importantly, the spoken words had been silenced. The few descriptive texts, known as "leaders," had to suggest what in a real drama would be explained and elaborated by the actors’ dialogues. It was, without a doubt, just a shadow of true theater, different not just like a photograph compared to a painting, but different like a photograph compared to a real person. And yet, as lackluster and insubstantial as the moving picture seemed next to a live performance, the huge advantage of being able to produce cheap copies made it understandable that producers aimed to evolve from short skits to grand dramas that could hold an audience's attention for hours. The kinematographic theater quickly built its Shakespeare repertoire; Ibsen was performed, and dramatized novels on screen became numerous. Victor Hugo and Dickens achieved new successes. Within a few years, the transition from trivial, silly practical jokes to Hamlet and Peer Gynt was so comprehensive that it established, once and for all, the possibility of providing a photographic version of any conceivable theater performance.

But while this movement to reproduce stage performances went on, elements were superadded which the technique of the camera allowed but which would hardly be possible in a theater. Hence the development led slowly to a certain deviation from the path of the drama. The difference which strikes the observer first results from the chance of the camera man to set his scene in the real backgrounds of nature and culture. The stage manager of the theater can paint the ocean and, if need be, can move some colored cloth to look like rolling waves; and yet how far is his effect surpassed by the superb ocean pictures when the scene is played on the real cliffs and the waves are thundering at their foot and the surf is foaming about the actors. The theater has its painted villages and vistas, its city streets and its foreign landscape backgrounds. But here the theater, in spite of the reality of the actors, appears thoroughly unreal compared with the throbbing life of the street scenes and of the foreign crowds in which the camera man finds his local color.

But while the effort to recreate stage performances continued, new elements were added that the camera's technique allowed but that would hardly be possible in a theater. As a result, the development slowly strayed from the traditional path of drama. The first noticeable difference comes from the cameraman's ability to set the scene against real backgrounds of nature and culture. A theater stage manager can paint an ocean and, if necessary, can move around colored fabric to mimic rolling waves; yet, the impact is far surpassed by stunning ocean shots when the scene is filmed on actual cliffs, with the waves crashing below and the surf foaming around the actors. The theater has its painted villages and vistas, its city streets and its foreign landscape backdrops. However, in this case, despite the actors’ realism, the theater seems completely unreal compared to the vibrant life of the street scenes and the diverse crowds that the cameraman captures for local color.

But still more characteristic is the rapidity with which the whole background can be changed in the moving pictures. Reinhardt's revolving stage had brought wonderful surprises to the theater-goer and had shifted the scene with a quickness which was unknown before. Yet how slow and clumsy does it remain compared with the routine changes of the photoplays. This changing of background is so easy for the camera that at a very early date this new feature of the plays was introduced. At first it served mostly humorous purposes. The public of the crude early shows enjoyed the flashlike quickness with which it could follow the eloper over the roofs of the town, upstairs and down, into cellar and attic, and jump into the auto and race over the country roads until the culprit fell over a bridge into the water and was caught by the police. This slapstick humor has by no means disappeared, but the rapid change of scenes has meanwhile been put into the service of much higher aims. The development of an artistic plot has been brought to possibilities which the real drama does not know, by allowing the eye to follow the hero and heroine continuously from place to place. Now he leaves his room, now we see him passing along the street, now he enters the house of his beloved, now he is led into the parlor, now she is hurrying to the library of her father, now they all go to the garden: ever new stage settings sliding into one another. Technical difficulties do not stand in the way. A set of pictures taken by the camera man a thousand miles away can be inserted for a few feet in the film, and the audience sees now the clubroom in New York, and now the snows of Alaska and now the tropics, near each other in the same reel.

But what's even more defining is how quickly the entire background can change in movies. Reinhardt's revolving stage had brought amazing surprises to theatergoers, shifting the scene with a speed that was unheard of before. Yet it seems slow and clumsy compared to the seamless transitions in films. Changing the background is so effortless for the camera that this feature was introduced early on. Initially, it mainly served comedic purposes. The audience of those early, rough shows loved the flash-like speed with which they could follow a character fleeing across rooftops, up and down stairs, into basements and attics, then jumping into a car and speeding down country roads until the character fell off a bridge into the water and got caught by the police. This slapstick humor still exists, but the rapid scene changes have now been harnessed for much greater storytelling. The development of an artistic plot has reached possibilities that traditional theater hasn’t explored, allowing us to follow the hero and heroine smoothly from one location to another. He leaves his room, now we see him walking down the street, then he enters his love's house, is led into the living room, she rushes to her father's library, and they all head to the garden: a series of new settings flowing into each other. Technical obstacles are no longer an issue. A set of shots taken by a cameraman a thousand miles away can be inserted for just a few seconds in the film, and the audience sees the clubroom in New York, then the snowy landscapes of Alaska, and then the tropics—all within the same reel.

Moreover the ease with which the scenes are altered allows us not only to hurry on to ever new spots, but to be at the same time in two or three places. The scenes become intertwined. We see the soldier on the battlefield, and his beloved one at home, in such steady alternation that we are simultaneously here and there. We see the man speaking into the telephone in New York and at the same time the woman who receives his message in Washington. It is no difficulty at all for the photoplay to have the two alternate a score of times in the few minutes of the long distance conversation.

Moreover, the ease with which the scenes are changed allows us to not only rush to new locations but also to be in two or three places at once. The scenes blend together. We see the soldier on the battlefield and his loved one at home, alternating so smoothly that we are simultaneously here and there. We see the man speaking into the phone in New York and at the same time the woman receiving his message in Washington. It's no problem for the movie to have the two switch back and forth multiple times during the short span of their long-distance conversation.

But with the quick change of background the photoartists also gained a rapidity of motion which leaves actual men behind. He needs only to turn the crank of the apparatus more quickly and the whole rhythm of the performance can be brought to a speed which may strikingly aid the farcical humor of the scene. And from here it was only a step to the performance of actions which could not be carried out in nature at all. At first this idea was made serviceable to rather rough comic effects. The policeman climbed up the solid stone front of a high building. The camera man had no difficulty in securing the effects, as it was only necessary to have the actor creep over a flat picture of the building spread on the floor. Every day brought us new tricks. We see how the magician breaks one egg after another and takes out of each egg a little fairy and puts one after another on his hand where they begin to dance a minuet. No theater could ever try to match such wonders, but for the camera they are not difficult; the little dancers were simply at a much further distance from the camera and therefore appeared in their Lilliputian size. Rich artistic effects have been secured, and while on the stage every fairy play is clumsy and hardly able to create an illusion, in the film we really see the man transformed into a beast and the flower into a girl. There is no limit to the trick pictures which the skill of the experts invent. The divers jump, feet first, out of the water to the springboard. It looks magical, and yet the camera man has simply to reverse his film and to run it from the end to the beginning of the action. Every dream becomes real, uncanny ghosts appear from nothing and disappear into nothing, mermaids swim through the waves and little elves climb out of the Easter lilies.

But with the rapid change of background, the photographers also gained a speed of motion that leaves real people behind. They just need to turn the crank of the camera faster, and the entire rhythm of the performance can be sped up, which can really enhance the comedic effect of the scene. It wasn't long before this idea led to actions that couldn’t happen in real life at all. Initially, this concept was used for some pretty basic comedic effects. The policeman climbed up the solid stone front of a tall building. The cameraman had no trouble capturing the scene since all he needed was for the actor to crawl over a flat image of the building on the floor. Each day brought new tricks. We see how the magician breaks one egg after another and pulls a little fairy out of each one, placing them on his hand where they start dancing a minuet. No theater could ever match such wonders, but they’re not hard for the camera; the little dancers were just much further away from the lens, making them look tiny. Stunning artistic effects have been achieved, and while every fairy tale on stage feels clumsy and fails to create an illusion, in film we can truly see a man transformed into a beast and a flower into a girl. There are no limits to the amazing images that the experts can create. The divers jump, feet first, out of the water to the springboard. It looks magical, yet the cameraman simply has to reverse his film and play it backward. Every dream comes to life, eerie ghosts appear from nowhere and vanish into thin air, mermaids swim through the waves, and little elves emerge from Easter lilies.

As the crank of the camera which takes the pictures can be stopped at any moment and the turning renewed only after some complete change has been made on the stage any substitution can be carried out without the public knowing of the break in the events. We see a man walking to the edge of a steep rock, leaving no doubt that it is a real person, and then by a slip he is hurled down into the abyss below. The film does not indicate that at the instant before the fall the camera has been stopped and the actor replaced by a stuffed dummy which begins to tumble when the movement of the film is started again. But not only dummies of the same size can be introduced. A little model brought quite near to the camera may take the place of the large real object at a far distance. We see at first the real big ship and can convince ourselves of its reality by seeing actual men climbing up the rigging. But when it comes to the final shipwreck, the movement of the film is stopped and the camera brought near to a little tank where a miniature model of the ship takes up the rôle of the original and explodes and really sinks to its two-feet-deep watery grave.

As the camera’s crank can be paused at any moment and started up again after a significant change has been made on stage, any substitutions can occur without the audience noticing the interruption in the action. We see a man walking to the edge of a steep rock, creating no doubt that he is a real person, and then with a slip, he is thrown down into the abyss below. The film doesn’t show that just before the fall, the camera was stopped and the actor was replaced by a stuffed dummy that begins to fall when the film starts moving again. But not only can life-sized dummies be used. A small model brought close to the camera can replace a large real object that’s far away. We see at first, the real big ship, and we can confirm its reality by seeing actual men climbing up the rigging. But when it comes to the final shipwreck, the film stops, and the camera is moved closer to a small tank where a miniature model of the ship takes on the role of the original, exploding and sinking to its two-feet-deep watery grave.

While, through this power to make impossible actions possible, unheard of effects could be reached, all still remained in the outer framework of the stage. The photoplay showed a performance, however rapid or unusual, as it would go on in the outer world. An entirely new perspective was opened when the managers of the film play introduced the "close-up" and similar new methods. As every friend of the film knows, the close-up is a scheme by which a particular part of the picture, perhaps only the face of the hero or his hand or only a ring on his finger, is greatly enlarged and replaces for an instant the whole stage. Even the most wonderful creations, the great historical plays where thousands fill the battlefields or the most fantastic caprices where fairies fly over the stage, could perhaps be performed in a theater, but this close-up leaves all stagecraft behind. Suddenly we see not Booth himself as he seeks to assassinate the president, but only his hand holding the revolver and the play of his excited fingers filling the whole field of vision. We no longer see at his desk the banker who opens the telegram, but the opened telegraphic message itself takes his place on the screen for a few seconds, and we read it over his shoulder.

While this ability to make impossible actions possible led to unbelievable effects, everything still stayed within the outer framework of the stage. The film displayed a performance, no matter how fast or unusual, as it would occur in the real world. A completely new perspective emerged when the film directors introduced the "close-up" and other new techniques. As every film buff knows, the close-up is a technique that enlarges a specific part of the scene, perhaps just the hero’s face, his hand, or a ring on his finger, taking the place of the entire stage for a moment. Even the most impressive creations, the grand historical dramas with thousands on the battlefield or the most imaginative stories where fairies soar above the stage, could possibly be performed in a theater, but this close-up transcends traditional stagecraft. Suddenly, we see not Booth himself as he attempts to assassinate the president, but just his hand gripping the revolver, with his excited fingers filling our entire view. We no longer see the banker at his desk opening the telegram; instead, the opened telegram itself appears on the screen for a few seconds, and we read it over his shoulder.

It is not necessary to enumerate still more changes which the development of the art of the film has brought since the days of the kinetoscope. The use of natural backgrounds, the rapid change of scenes, the intertwining of the actions in different scenes, the changes of the rhythms of action, the passing through physically impossible experiences, the linking of disconnected movements, the realization of supernatural effects, the gigantic enlargement of small details: these may be sufficient as characteristic illustrations of the essential trend. They show that the progress of the photoplay did not lead to a more and more perfect photographic reproduction of the theater stage, but led away from the theater altogether. Superficial impressions suggest the opposite and still leave the esthetically careless observer in the belief that the photoplay is a cheap substitute for the real drama, a theater performance as good or as bad as a photographic reproduction allows. But this traditional idea has become utterly untrue. The art of the photoplay has developed so many new features of its own, features which have not even any similarity to the technique of the stage that the question arises: is it not really a new art which long since left behind the mere film reproduction of the theater and which ought to be acknowledged in its own esthetic independence? This right to independent recognition has so far been ignored. Practically everybody who judged the photoplays from the esthetic point of view remained at the old comparison between the film and the graphophone. The photoplay is still something which simply imitates the true art of the drama on the stage. May it not be, on the contrary, that it does not imitate or replace anything, but is in itself an art as different from that of the theater as the painter's art is different from that of the sculptor? And may it not be high time, in the interest of theory and of practice, to examine the esthetic conditions which would give independent rights to the new art? If this is really the situation, it must be a truly fascinating problem, as it would give the chance to watch the art in its first unfolding. A new esthetic cocoon is broken; where will the butterfly's wings carry him?

It’s unnecessary to list even more changes that the evolution of film has brought since the days of the kinetoscope. The use of natural backgrounds, quick scene changes, the blending of actions from different scenes, shifts in action rhythms, going through physically impossible experiences, connecting disjointed movements, creating supernatural effects, and the huge enlargement of small details: these examples are enough to illustrate the main trend. They demonstrate that the advancement of film did not lead to a more accurate photographic reproduction of stage drama, but rather moved away from the theater entirely. Surface impressions suggest the opposite and still leave the casually observant person believing that film is just a cheap alternative to real drama, a theater performance that's as good or bad as the photographic reproduction can allow. But this traditional notion has become completely false. The art of film has developed so many unique features that have no relation to stage techniques, that one might ask: isn't it truly a new art that has long since moved past merely reproducing theater and deserves to be recognized for its own aesthetic independence? This right to independent recognition has largely been overlooked. Nearly everyone who has evaluated films from an aesthetic perspective has stuck to the outdated comparison between film and phonograph recordings. Film is still seen as simply imitating the real art of drama on stage. Could it be that, on the contrary, it neither imitates nor replaces anything, but is itself an art form as distinct from theater as painting is from sculpture? And isn’t it high time, for the sake of both theory and practice, to explore the aesthetic conditions that would grant independent rights to this new art? If this is truly the case, it presents an incredibly fascinating issue, as it would allow us to witness the art in its initial evolution. A new aesthetic cocoon is breaking; where will the butterfly's wings take it?

We have at last reached the real problem of this little book. We want to study the right of the photoplay, hitherto ignored by esthetics, to be classed as an art in itself under entirely new mental life conditions. What we need for this study is evidently, first, an insight into the means by which the moving pictures impress us and appeal to us. Not the physical means and technical devices are in question, but the mental means. What psychological factors are involved when we watch the happenings on the screen? But secondly, we must ask what characterizes the independence of an art, what constitutes the conditions under which the works of a special art stand. The first inquiry is psychological, the second esthetic; the two belong intimately together. Hence we turn first to the psychological aspect of the moving pictures and later to the artistic one.

We have finally arrived at the real issue of this little book. We want to explore the right of film, which has been overlooked by aesthetics, to be recognized as an art form in its own right under entirely new mental life conditions. What we need for this exploration is clearly, first, an understanding of how moving images impact and attract us. We’re not talking about physical means or technical devices, but rather the mental factors. What psychological elements come into play when we watch what unfolds on the screen? Secondly, we need to consider what defines the independence of an art form, what determines the conditions under which the works of a specific art exist. The first question is psychological, the second is aesthetic; both are closely related. Therefore, we will first examine the psychological aspect of moving images and then the artistic aspect.


PART I

THE PSYCHOLOGY OF THE PHOTOPLAY


CHAPTER III [1]

DEPTH AND MOVEMENT

The problem is now quite clear before us. Do the photoplays furnish us only a photographic reproduction of a stage performance; is their aim thus simply to be an inexpensive substitute for the real theater, and is their esthetic standing accordingly far below that of the true dramatic art, related to it as the photograph of a painting to the original canvas of the master? Or do the moving pictures bring us an independent art, controlled by esthetic laws of its own, working with mental appeals which are fundamentally different from those of the theater, with a sphere of its own and with ideal aims of its own? If this so far neglected problem is ours, we evidently need not ask in our further discussions about all which books on moving pictures have so far put into the foreground, namely the physical technique of producing the pictures on the film or of projecting the pictures on the screen, or anything else which belongs to the technical or physical or economic aspect of the photoplay industry. Moreover it is then evidently not our concern to deal with those moving pictures which serve mere curiosity or the higher desires for information and instruction. Those educational pictures may give us delight, and certainly much esthetic enjoyment may be combined with the intellectual satisfaction, when the wonders of distant lands are unveiled to us. The landscape setting of such a travel film may be a thing of beauty, but the pictures are not taken for art's sake. The aim is to serve the spread of knowledge.

The issue is now clear to us. Do movies only provide a visual copy of a stage performance? Is their purpose just to be a cheaper alternative to live theater, and does that mean their artistic value is much lower than true dramatic art, similar to how a photograph of a painting compares to the original canvas by the master? Or do films present us with a unique art form, governed by its own aesthetic principles, appealing to us in ways that are fundamentally different from theater, with its own realm and ideal goals? If this overlooked issue is ours, we obviously don’t need to focus on the technical aspects of filmmaking, such as how images are created on film or projected on screen, or anything related to the technical, physical, or economic sides of the movie industry. Furthermore, it's not our job to discuss movies that only aim to satisfy curiosity or the desire for information and education. While those educational films can be enjoyable and certainly offer a lot of aesthetic appreciation along with intellectual satisfaction when showcasing the wonders of far-off places, the visuals are not created solely for the sake of art. Their aim is to promote knowledge.

Our esthetic interest turns to the means by which the photoplay influences the mind of the spectator. If we try to understand and to explain the means by which music exerts its powerful effects, we do not reach our goal by describing the structure of the piano and of the violin, or by explaining the physical laws of sound. We must proceed to the psychology and ask for the mental processes of the hearing of tones and of chords, of harmonies and disharmonies, of tone qualities and tone intensities, of rhythms and phrases, and must trace how these elements are combined in the melodies and compositions. In this way we turn to the photoplay, at first with a purely psychological interest, and ask for the elementary excitements of the mind which enter into our experience of the moving pictures. We now disregard entirely the idea of the theater performance. We should block our way if we were to start from the theater and were to ask how much is left out in the mere photographic substitute. We approach the art of the film theater as if it stood entirely on its own ground, and extinguish all memory of the world of actors. We analyze the mental processes which this specific form of artistic endeavor produces in us.

Our aesthetic interest focuses on how the film influences the viewer's mind. If we want to understand and explain how music has its strong effects, we don't achieve that by just describing how a piano or a violin is built, or by talking about the physical laws of sound. We need to dig into psychology and examine the mental processes involved in perceiving tones and chords, harmonies and disharmonies, tone qualities and intensities, rhythms, and phrases, and we must explore how these elements come together in melodies and compositions. Similarly, when we look at film, we start with a purely psychological interest and consider the basic mental stimuli involved in our experience of moving images. We completely set aside the concept of a theatrical performance. It would hinder our understanding if we began with the theater and asked how much is missing in just a photographic version. Instead, we approach the art of film as if it exists completely on its own, disregarding any memories of the world of actors. We analyze the mental processes that this unique form of artistic expression evokes in us.

To begin at the beginning, the photoplay consists of a series of flat pictures in contrast to the plastic objects of the real world which surrounds us. But we may stop at once: what does it mean to say that the surroundings appear to the mind plastic and the moving pictures flat? The psychology of this difference is easily misunderstood. Of course, when we are sitting in the picture palace we know that we see a flat screen and that the object which we see has only two dimensions, right-left, and up-down, but not the third dimension of depth, of distance toward us or away from us. It is flat like a picture and never plastic like a work of sculpture or architecture or like a stage. Yet this is knowledge and not immediate impression. We have no right whatever to say that the scenes which we see on the screen appear to us as flat pictures.

To start at the beginning, the movie consists of a series of flat images, unlike the three-dimensional objects of the real world around us. But let's pause for a moment: what does it mean to say that our surroundings appear three-dimensional while the moving images seem flat? The psychology behind this difference is often misunderstood. When we're in the theater, we know we're looking at a flat screen and that what we see has only two dimensions—width and height—but lacks the third dimension of depth, the distance towards us or away from us. It’s flat like a picture and never three-dimensional like a sculpture, architecture, or a stage. However, this is knowledge, not our immediate impression. We have no basis to claim that the scenes we see on the screen appear to us as flat images.

We may become more strongly conscious of this difference between an object of our knowledge and an object of our impression, if we remember a well-known instrument, the stereoscope. The stereoscope, which was quite familiar to the parlor of a former generation, consists of two prisms through which the two eyes look toward two photographic views of a landscape. But the two photographic views are not identical. The landscape is taken from two different points of view, once from the right and once from the left. As soon as these two views are put into the stereoscope the right eye sees through the prism only the view from the right, the left eye only the view from the left. We know very well that only two flat pictures are before us; yet we cannot help seeing the landscape in strongly plastic forms. The two different views are combined in one presentation of the landscape in which the distant objects appear much further away from us than the foreground. We feel immediately the depth of things. It is as if we were looking at a small plastic model of the landscape and in spite of our objective knowledge cannot recognize the flat pictures in the solid forms which we perceive. It cannot be otherwise, because whenever in practical life we see an object, a vase on our table, as a solid body, we get the impression of its plastic character first of all by seeing it with our two eyes from two different points of view. The perspective in which our right eye sees the things on our table is different from the perspective for the left eye. Our plastic seeing therefore depends upon this combination of two different perspective views, and whenever we offer to the two eyes two such one-sided views, they must be combined into the impression of the substantial thing. The stereoscope thus illustrates clearly that the knowledge of the flat character of pictures by no means excludes the actual perception of depth, and the question arises whether the moving pictures of the photoplay, in spite of our knowledge concerning the flatness of the screen, do not give us after all the impression of actual depth.

We may become more aware of the difference between something we know and something we perceive if we think about a well-known device, the stereoscope. The stereoscope, which was quite popular in the living rooms of a past generation, consists of two prisms that allow each eye to look at two different photographic views of a landscape. However, the two views are not the same. The landscape is captured from two different angles, once from the right and once from the left. When these views are placed in the stereoscope, the right eye sees only the right view through its prism, while the left eye sees only the left view. We understand that there are just two flat images in front of us, yet we can't help but see the landscape in very three-dimensional forms. The two different views merge into one representation of the landscape, where distant objects seem much further away than those in the foreground. We instantly feel the depth of the scene. It's like looking at a small three-dimensional model of the landscape, and despite knowing it consists of flat images, we can't recognize those flat pictures in the solid forms we perceive. This makes sense because, whenever we see an object, like a vase on our table, as a solid body, we initially get the sense of its three-dimensionality by viewing it with both eyes from different angles. The perspective our right eye has of the objects on the table is different from the perspective of our left eye. Our three-dimensional perception relies on this combination of two different views, and whenever we present the two eyes with these one-sided views, they must merge into the impression of the substantial object. The stereoscope clearly demonstrates that knowing pictures are flat doesn't eliminate the actual perception of depth, raising the question of whether moving images in films, despite our awareness of the screen's flatness, give us a genuine sense of depth after all.

It may be said offhand that even the complete appearance of depth such as the stereoscope offers would be in no way contradictory to the idea of moving pictures. Then the photoplay would give the same plastic impression which the real stage offers. All that would be needed is this. When the actors play the scenes, not a single but a double camera would have to take the pictures. Such a double camera focuses the scene from two different points of view, corresponding to the position of the two eyes. Both films are then to be projected on the screen at the same time by a double projection apparatus which secures complete correspondence of the two pictures so that in every instance the left and the right view are overlapping on the screen. This would give, of course, a chaotic, blurring image. But if the apparatus which projects the left side view has a green glass in front of the lens and the one which projects the right side view a red glass, and every person in the audience has a pair of spectacles with the left glass green and the right glass red—a cardboard lorgnette with red and green gelatine paper would do the same service and costs only a few cents—the left eye would see only the left view, the right eye only the right view. We could not see the red lines through the green glass nor the green lines through the red glass. In the moment the left eye gets the left side view only and the right eye the right side view, the whole chaos of lines on the screen is organized and we see the pictured room on the screen with the same depth as if it were really a solid room set on the stage and as if the rear wall in the room were actually ten or twenty feet behind the furniture in the front. The effect is so striking that no one can overcome the feeling of depth under these conditions.

It can be said casually that even the full effect of depth, like what the stereoscope provides, wouldn’t contradict the idea of moving pictures. The film would create the same three-dimensional impression that a real stage provides. All that would be needed is this: when the actors perform the scenes, not one but a dual camera would have to take the shots. This dual camera captures the scene from two different perspectives, just like the positioning of our two eyes. Both films would then be projected onto the screen simultaneously by a dual projection system that ensures the two images align perfectly, so that the left and right views overlap on the screen. This would initially result in a chaotic, blurry image. However, if the projector for the left view uses a green filter in front of its lens and the one for the right view uses a red filter, and everyone in the audience has on a pair of glasses with the left lens green and the right lens red—a cardboard viewer with red and green gelatine paper would do the same job and only cost a few cents—the left eye would only see the left view, while the right eye would see only the right view. We wouldn’t be able to see the red lines through the green filter or the green lines through the red filter. The moment the left eye receives just the left view and the right eye gets only the right view, the chaotic lines on the screen become organized, and we perceive the room displayed on the screen with the same depth as if it were a real solid room set on stage, as if the back wall of the room were actually ten or twenty feet behind the furniture in front. The effect is so powerful that no one can ignore the sense of depth under these conditions.

But while the regular motion pictures certainly do not offer us this complete plastic impression, it would simply be the usual confusion between knowledge about the picture and its real appearance if we were to deny that we get a certain impression of depth. If several persons move in a room, we gain distinctly the feeling that one moves behind another in the film picture. They move toward us and from us just as much as they move to the right and left. We actually perceive the chairs or the rear wall of the room as further away from us than the persons in the foreground. This is not surprising if we stop to think how we perceive the depth, for instance, of a real stage. Let us fancy that we sit in the orchestra of a real theater and see before us the stage set as a room with furniture and persons in it. We now see the different objects on the stage at different distances, some near, some far. One of the causes was just mentioned. We see everything with our right or our left eye from different points of view. But if now we close one eye and look at the stage with the right eye only, the plastic effect does not disappear. The psychological causes for this perception of depth with one eye are essentially the differences of apparent size, the perspective relations, the shadows, and the actions performed in the space. Now all these factors which help us to grasp the furniture on the stage as solid and substantial play their rôle no less in the room which is projected on the screen.

But while standard movies definitely don't give us a complete 3D impression, it would just be a typical misunderstanding about the film image and its actual appearance if we were to say we don’t get a sense of depth. When several people move in a room, we clearly feel that one person is behind another in the film. They move toward us and away from us just as much as they move to the right and left. We actually see the chairs or the back wall of the room as being farther away from us than the people in the foreground. This isn't surprising when we consider how we perceive depth, for example, in a real theater. Imagine that we're sitting in the orchestra section of a real theater, looking at the stage set up like a room with furniture and people in it. We see the different objects on stage at various distances—some near and some far. One of the reasons for this is what was just mentioned. We view everything with our right or left eye from different angles. But if we close one eye and look at the stage with just the right eye, the 3D effect doesn't go away. The psychological reasons for this perception of depth with one eye mainly involve differences in apparent size, perspective relationships, shadows, and the actions happening in the space. Now, all these factors that help us perceive the furniture on stage as solid and substantial play their role just as much in the room projected on the screen.

We are too readily inclined to imagine that our eye can directly grasp the different distances in our surroundings. Yet we need only imagine that a large glass plate is put in the place of the curtain covering the whole stage. Now we see the stage through the glass; and if we look at it with one eye only it is evident that every single spot on the stage must throw its light to our eye by light rays which cross the glass plate at a particular point. For our seeing it would make no difference whether the stage is actually behind that glass plate or whether all the light rays which pass through the plate come from the plate itself. If those rays with all their different shades of light and dark started from the surface of the glass plate, the effect on the one eye would necessarily be the same as if they originated at different distances behind the glass. This is exactly the case of the screen. If the pictures are well taken and the projection is sharp and we sit at the right distance from the picture, we must have the same impression as if we looked through a glass plate into a real space.

We are quick to think that our eyes can directly perceive the various distances in our surroundings. However, imagine if a large glass plate replaced the curtain covering the whole stage. Now we see the stage through the glass, and if we look at it with just one eye, it becomes clear that each spot on the stage must project its light to our eye through light rays that cross the glass plate at a specific point. For our vision, it wouldn't make a difference whether the stage is actually behind that glass plate or if all the light rays passing through the plate come from the plate itself. If those rays, with their various shades of light and dark, originated from the surface of the glass plate, the effect on one eye would be the same as if they came from different distances behind the glass. This is exactly how a screen works. If the images are well-captured and the projection is clear, and we sit at the right distance from the picture, we will feel just as though we are looking through a glass plate into real space.

The photoplay is therefore poorly characterized if the flatness of the pictorial view is presented as an essential feature. That flatness is an objective part of the technical physical arrangements, but not a feature of that which we really see in the performance of the photoplay. We are there in the midst of a three-dimensional world, and the movements of the persons or of the animals or even of the lifeless things, like the streaming of the water in the brook or the movements of the leaves in the wind, strongly maintain our immediate impression of depth. Many secondary features characteristic of the motion picture may help. For instance, by a well-known optical illusion the feeling of depth is strengthened if the foreground is at rest and the background moving. Thus the ship passing in front of the motionless background of the harbor by no means suggests depth to the same degree as the picture taken on the gliding ship itself so that the ship appears to be at rest and the harbor itself passing by.

The photoplay is poorly defined if the flatness of the visual view is seen as a key feature. That flatness is an objective aspect of the technical setup, but not a characteristic of what we truly perceive in the performance of the photoplay. We’re in the middle of a three-dimensional world, and the movements of people, animals, or even inanimate objects, like the flowing water in the brook or the rustling leaves in the wind, strongly enhance our immediate sense of depth. Many secondary aspects typical of motion pictures can help with this. For example, through a well-known optical illusion, the sense of depth is enhanced when the foreground is still and the background is moving. Therefore, a ship passing in front of a stationary harbor doesn't suggest depth as effectively as a shot taken on the moving ship itself, where the ship seems to be still while the harbor appears to be moving by.

The depth effect is so undeniable that some minds are struck by it as the chief power in the impressions from the screen. Vachel Lindsay, the poet, feels the plastic character of the persons in the foreground so fully that he interprets those plays with much individual action as a kind of sculpture in motion. He says: "The little far off people on the oldfashioned speaking stage do not appeal to the plastic sense in this way. They are by comparison mere bits of pasteboard with sweet voices, while on the other hand the photoplay foreground is full of dumb giants. The bodies of these giants are in high sculptural relief." Others have emphasized that this strong feeling of depth touches them most when persons in the foreground stand with a far distant landscape as background—much more than when they are seen in a room. Psychologically this is not surprising either. If the scene were a real room, every detail in it would appear differently to the two eyes. In the room on the screen both eyes receive the same impression, and the result is that the consciousness of depth is inhibited. But when a far distant landscape is the only background, the impression from the picture and life is indeed the same. The trees or mountains which are several hundred feet distant from the eye give to both eyes exactly the same impression, inasmuch as the small difference of position between the two eyeballs has no influence compared with the distance of the objects from our face. We would see the mountains with both eyes alike in reality, and therefore we feel unhampered in our subjective interpretation of far distant vision when the screen offers exactly the same picture of the mountains to our two eyes. Hence in such cases we believe that we see the persons really in the foreground and the landscape far away.

The depth effect is so undeniable that some people are struck by it as the main force behind the impressions from the screen. Vachel Lindsay, the poet, perceives the tangible quality of the characters in the foreground so vividly that he interprets plays with a lot of individual action as a kind of sculpture in motion. He says: "The little distant people on the old-fashioned stage don’t resonate with the tangible sense in this way. They are, in comparison, just bits of cardboard with nice voices, while the photoplay foreground is filled with silent giants. The bodies of these giants are in high sculptural relief." Others have pointed out that this strong feeling of depth affects them most when people in the foreground stand against a faraway landscape as a background—much more than when they are seen in a room. Psychologically, this isn’t surprising either. If the scene were a real room, every detail would appear differently to each eye. In a room on the screen, both eyes receive the same impression, which inhibits the sense of depth. But when a far-off landscape is the sole background, the impression from the picture and life is indeed the same. The trees or mountains that are several hundred feet away from the eye give both eyes exactly the same impression, since the small difference in position between the two eyeballs is insignificant compared to the distance of the objects from our face. We would see the mountains with both eyes the same way in real life, and therefore we feel free in our subjective interpretation of distant vision when the screen presents an identical picture of the mountains to both of our eyes. Thus, in these cases, we believe that we see the people clearly in the foreground while the landscape is way in the back.

Nevertheless we are never deceived; we are fully conscious of the depth, and yet we do not take it for real depth. Too much stands in the way. Some unfavorable conditions are still deficiencies of the technique; for instance, the camera picture in some respects exaggerates the distances. If we see through the open door of the rear wall into one or two other rooms, they appear like a distant corridor. Moreover we have ideal conditions for vision in the right perspective only when we sit in front of the screen at a definite distance. We ought to sit where we see the objects in the picture at the same angle at which the camera photographed the originals. If we are too near or too far or too much to one side, we perceive the plastic scene from a viewpoint which would demand an entirely different perspective than that which the camera fixated. In motionless pictures this is less disturbing; in moving pictures every new movement to or from the background must remind us of the apparent distortion. Moreover, the size and the frame and the whole setting strongly remind us of the unreality of the perceived space. But the chief point remains that we see the whole picture with both eyes and not with only one, and that we are constantly reminded of the flatness of the picture because the two eyes receive identical impressions. And we may add an argument nearly related to it, namely, that the screen as such is an object of our perception and demands an adaptation of the eye and an independent localization. We are drawn into this conflict of perception even when we look into a mirror. If we stand three feet from a large mirror on the wall, we see our reflection three feet from our eyes in the plate glass and we see it at the same time six feet from our eye behind the glass. Both localizations take hold of our mind and produce a peculiar interference. We all have learned to ignore it, but characteristic illusions remain which indicate the reality of this doubleness.

Still, we're never fooled; we fully understand the depth, but we don't really see it as true depth. Too much gets in the way. Some unfavorable conditions are still shortcomings in the technique; for example, the camera image sometimes exaggerates distances. When we look through the open door of the back wall into one or two other rooms, they seem like a distant hallway. Furthermore, we only have ideal conditions for viewing in the right perspective when we sit at a specific distance in front of the screen. We should sit where we can see the objects in the image from the same angle at which the camera captured the originals. If we're too close, too far away, or too much to one side, we see the three-dimensional scene from a viewpoint that requires a completely different perspective than what the camera recorded. This is less troublesome with still images; in moving pictures, every new movement toward or away from the background has to remind us of the apparent distortion. Also, the size, frame, and entire setting strongly highlight the unreal nature of the perceived space. But the main point remains that we view the entire image with both eyes, not just one, which constantly reminds us of the flatness of the picture because both eyes receive the same impressions. We can add a nearly related argument: the screen itself is an object of our perception, requiring the eye to adapt and independently locate itself. We experience this conflict of perception even when we look in a mirror. If we stand three feet away from a large wall mirror, we see our reflection three feet from our eyes in the glass and at the same time, six feet behind the glass. Both of these locations engage our minds and create a strange interference. We’ve all learned to ignore it, but characteristic illusions remain that indicate the reality of this doubleness.

In the case of the picture on the screen this conflict is much stronger. We certainly see the depth, and yet we cannot accept it. There is too much which inhibits belief and interferes with the interpretation of the people and landscape before us as truly plastic. They are surely not simply pictures. The persons can move toward us and away from us, and the river flows into a distant valley. And yet the distance in which the people move is not the distance of our real space, such as the theater shows, and the persons themselves are not flesh and blood. It is a unique inner experience, which is characteristic of the perception of the photoplays. We have reality with all its true dimensions; and yet it keeps the fleeting, passing surface suggestion without true depth and fullness, as different from a mere picture as from a mere stage performance. It brings our mind into a peculiar complex state; and we shall see that this plays a not unimportant part in the mental make-up of the whole photoplay.

In the case of the picture on the screen, this conflict is much stronger. We definitely see the depth, and yet we can't accept it. There's too much that disrupts belief and interferes with how we interpret the people and landscape before us as truly three-dimensional. They are definitely not just images. The people can move closer to us and further away, and the river flows into a distant valley. Yet, the distance in which the people move isn’t the same as our real space, like in the theater, and the people themselves aren’t real flesh and blood. It’s a unique inner experience, which is typical of how we perceive films. We have reality with all its true dimensions; and yet it maintains a fleeting, surface-level impression without real depth and fullness, unlike a mere image or a simple stage performance. It puts our minds into a peculiar complex state; and we will see that this plays a significant role in the mental makeup of the entire film.

While the problem of depth in the film picture is easily ignored, the problem of movement forces itself on every spectator. It seems as if here the really essential trait of the film performance is to be found, and that the explanation of the motion in the pictures is the chief task which the psychologist must meet. We know that any single picture which the film of the photographer has fixed is immovable. We know, furthermore, that we do not see the passing by of the long strip of film. We know that it is rolled from one roll and rolled up on another, but that this movement from picture to picture is not visible. It goes on while the field is darkened. What objectively reaches our eye is one motionless picture after another, but the replacing of one by another through a forward movement of the film cannot reach our eye at all. Why do we, nevertheless, see a continuous movement? The problem did not arise with the kinetoscope only but had interested the preceding generations who amused themselves with the phenakistoscope and the stroboscopic disks or the magic cylinder of the zoötrope and bioscope. The child who made his zoötrope revolve and looked through the slits of the black cover in the drum saw through every slit the drawing of a dog in one particular position. Yet as the twenty-four slits passed the eye, the twenty-four different positions blended into one continuous jumping movement of the poodle.

While it's easy to overlook the issue of depth in film, the issue of movement grabs the attention of every viewer. It seems like the key aspect of film performance lies here, and understanding how motion works in pictures is the main challenge for psychologists. We know that any single image captured by the filmmaker is still. We also know that we don’t see the long strip of film move by. We know it’s unrolled from one reel and re-rolled onto another, but that transition from one picture to the next is invisible. It happens while the screen is dark. What we actually see are a series of still images, but the shift from one to another, due to the film moving forward, cannot be perceived at all. So, why do we still see continuous movement? This issue didn’t just start with the kinetoscope; it intrigued earlier generations who entertained themselves with the phenakistoscope and stroboscopic disks or the magic cylinder of the zoetrope and bioscope. The child who spun his zoetrope and peered through the slits of the drum cover saw the image of a dog in one specific position through each slit. Yet, as the twenty-four slits moved past their eyes, the twenty-four different positions combined into one seamless jumping motion of the poodle.

But this so-called stroboscopic phenomenon, however interesting it was, seemed to offer hardly any difficulty. The friends of the zoötrope surely knew another little plaything, the thaumatrope. Dr. Paris had invented it in 1827. It shows two pictures, one on the front, one on the rear side of a card. As soon as the card is quickly revolved about a central axis, the two pictures fuse into one. If a horse is on one side and a rider on the other, if a cage is on one and a bird on the other, we see the rider on the horse and the bird in the cage. It cannot be otherwise. It is simply the result of the positive afterimages. If at dark we twirl a glowing joss stick in a circle, we do not see one point moving from place to place, but we see a continuous circular line. It is nowhere broken because, if the movement is quick, the positive afterimage of the light in its first position is still effective in our eye when the glowing point has passed through the whole circle and has reached the first position again.

But this so-called stroboscopic phenomenon, while interesting, didn't seem to pose much of a challenge. The friends of the zoetrope definitely knew about another little gadget, the thaumatrope. Dr. Paris invented it in 1827. It displays two images, one on the front and one on the back of a card. When the card is spun quickly around a central axis, the two images blend into one. If there's a horse on one side and a rider on the other, or a cage on one side and a bird on the other, we see the rider on the horse and the bird in the cage. It has to be that way. It's simply due to positive afterimages. If we spin a glowing incense stick in a circle in the dark, we don't see a single point moving from place to place; we see a continuous circular line. It's never broken because, if the movement is fast, the positive afterimage of the light in its initial position is still active in our eye when the glowing point has completed the full circle and returned to its starting position again.

We speak of this effect as a positive afterimage, because it is a real continuation of the first impression and stands in contrast to the so-called negative afterimage in which the aftereffect is opposite to the original stimulus. In the case of a negative afterimage the light impression leaves a dark spot, the dark impression gives a light afterimage. Black becomes white and white becomes black; in the world of colors red leaves a green and green a red afterimage, yellow a blue and blue a yellow afterimage. If we look at the crimson sinking sun and then at a white wall, we do not see red light spots but green dark spots. Compared with these negative pictures, the positive afterimages are short and they last through any noticeable time only with rather intense illumination. Yet they are evidently sufficient to bridge the interval between the two slits in the stroboscopic disk or in the zoötrope, the interval in which the black paper passes the eye and in which accordingly no new stimulus reaches the nerves. The routine explanation of the appearance of movement was accordingly: that every picture of a particular position left in the eye an afterimage until the next picture with the slightly changed position of the jumping animal or of the marching men was in sight, and the afterimage of this again lasted until the third came. The afterimages were responsible for the fact that no interruptions were noticeable, while the movement itself resulted simply from the passing of one position into another. What else is the perception of movement but the seeing of a long series of different positions? If instead of looking through the zoötrope we watch a real trotting horse on a real street, we see its whole body in ever new progressing positions and its legs in all phases of motion; and this continuous series is our perception of the movement itself.

We call this effect a positive afterimage because it's a true continuation of the first impression and is different from the so-called negative afterimage, where the aftereffect is the opposite of the original stimulus. With a negative afterimage, a light impression leaves a dark spot, while a dark impression creates a light afterimage. Black turns to white, and white turns to black; in terms of colors, red leaves a green afterimage, green leaves a red afterimage, yellow leaves a blue afterimage, and blue leaves a yellow afterimage. If we look at the crimson setting sun and then at a white wall, we don’t see red light spots but green dark spots. Compared to these negative images, positive afterimages are brief and only last noticeably with fairly bright light. However, they are clearly enough to fill the gap between the two slits in the stroboscopic disk or in the zoötrope, the gap where the black paper passes the eye and where no new stimulus reaches the nerves. The standard explanation for the appearance of movement is that each image of a specific position leaves an afterimage in the eye until the next image, slightly changed in position—like the jumping animal or marching men—comes into view, and that afterimage lasts until the third image appears. The afterimages are responsible for the fact that there are no noticeable interruptions, while the movement itself comes from the transition from one position to another. What else is the perception of movement but the observation of a long sequence of different positions? If instead of looking through the zoötrope we watch a real trotting horse on a real street, we see its entire body in continuously shifting positions, its legs in all phases of motion; and this continuous sequence is our perception of the movement itself.

This seems very simple. Yet it was slowly discovered that the explanation is far too simple and that it does not in the least do justice to the true experiences. With the advance of modern laboratory psychology the experimental investigations frequently turned to the analysis of our perception of movement. In the last thirty years many researches, notably those of Stricker, Exner, Hall, James, Fischer, Stern, Marbe, Lincke, Wertheimer, and Korte have thrown new light on the problem by carefully devised experiments. One result of them came quickly into the foreground of the newer view: the perception of movement is an independent experience which cannot be reduced to a simple seeing of a series of different positions. A characteristic content of consciousness must be added to such a series of visual impressions. The mere idea of succeeding phases of movement is not at all the original movement idea. This is suggested first by the various illusions of movement. We may believe that we perceive a movement where no actual changes of visual impressions occur. This, to be sure, may result from a mere misinterpretation of the impression: for instance when in the railway train at the station we look out of the window and believe suddenly that our train is moving, while in reality the train on the neighboring track has started. It is the same when we see the moon floating quickly through the motionless clouds. We are inclined to consider as being at rest that which we fixate and to interpret the relative changes in the field of vision as movements of those parts which we do not fixate.

This seems very simple. Yet it was gradually discovered that the explanation is much too simplistic and doesn’t fully capture the true experiences. With the progress of modern laboratory psychology, experimental investigations often shifted to analyzing our perception of movement. Over the last thirty years, many studies, especially those by Stricker, Exner, Hall, James, Fischer, Stern, Marbe, Lincke, Wertheimer, and Korte, have shed new light on the issue through carefully designed experiments. One outcome of these studies quickly became central to the newer perspective: the perception of movement is an independent experience that can't simply be boiled down to seeing a series of different positions. A distinctive content of consciousness needs to be added to such a series of visual impressions. The mere notion of successive phases of movement doesn't fully capture the original idea of movement. This is first suggested by various movement illusions. We might think we perceive movement where no actual changes in visual impressions occur. This can happen due to a simple misinterpretation of what we see; for example, when we're on a train at the station and look out the window, we might suddenly believe that our train is moving when, in reality, the train on the adjacent track has started. It’s similar when we see the moon seemingly gliding quickly through still clouds. We tend to consider as being at rest what we focus on, interpreting the relative changes in our field of vision as movements of the parts we don’t focus on.

But it is different when we come, for instance, to those illusions in which movement is forced on our perception by contrast and aftereffect. We look from a bridge into the flowing water and if we turn our eyes toward the land the motionless shore seems to swim in the opposite direction. It is not sufficient in such cases to refer to contrasting eye movements. It can easily be shown by experiments that these movements and counter-movements in the field of vision can proceed in opposite directions at the same time and no eye, of course, is able to move upward and downward, or right and left, in the same moment. A very characteristic experiment can be performed with a black spiral line on a white disk. If we revolve such a disk slowly around its center, the spiral line produces the impression of a continuous enlargement of concentric curves. The lines start at the center and expand until they disappear in the periphery. If we look for a minute or two into this play of the expanding curves and then turn our eyes to the face of a neighbor, we see at once how the features of the face begin to shrink. It looks as if the whole face were elastically drawn toward its center. If we revolve the disk in the opposite direction, the curves seem to move from the edge of the disk toward the center, becoming smaller and smaller, and if then we look toward a face, the person seems to swell up and every point in the face seems to move from the nose toward the chin or forehead or ears. Our eye which watches such an aftereffect cannot really move at the same time from the center of the face toward both ears and the hair and the chin. The impression of movement must therefore have other conditions than the actual performance of the movements, and above all it is clear from such tests that the seeing of the movements is a unique experience which can be entirely independent from the actual seeing of successive positions. The eye itself gets the impression of a face at rest, and yet we see the face in the one case shrinking, in the other case swelling; in the one case every point apparently moving toward the center, in the other case apparently moving away from the center. The experience of movement is here evidently produced by the spectator's mind and not excited from without.

But it's different when we look at those illusions where movement is pushed on our perception by contrast and aftereffects. We gaze from a bridge into the flowing water and when we shift our eyes toward the land, the still shore looks like it’s moving in the opposite direction. In these situations, it's not enough to just mention contrasting eye movements. Experiments easily show that these movements and counter-movements in our field of vision can happen in opposite directions at the same time, and no eye can move up and down or side to side at the same moment. A very telling experiment can be done with a black spiral line on a white disk. If we slowly spin this disk around its center, the spiral line gives the impression of continuously expanding concentric curves. The lines start at the center and spread out until they vanish at the edges. If we focus on this display of spreading curves for a minute or two and then glance at a neighbor's face, we immediately notice how their features begin to shrink. It seems like the whole face is being pulled elastically toward its center. If we spin the disk in the opposite direction, the curves appear to move from the edge of the disk toward the center, growing smaller and smaller, and when we then look at a face, the person seems to inflate, with every part of their face appearing to shift from the nose toward the chin, forehead, or ears. Our eye, which observes this aftereffect, can't actually move simultaneously from the center of the face toward both ears, the hair, and the chin. Therefore, the perception of movement must rely on conditions other than the actual movements happening, and it's clear from these tests that seeing movements is a unique experience that can be completely independent of actually seeing successive positions. The eye itself perceives a face at rest, yet we see the face shrinking in one case and swelling in the other; in one situation, every point seems to move toward the center, while in the other, it appears to move away from the center. The experience of movement is clearly produced by the spectator's mind and not triggered by external factors.

We may approach the same result also from experiments of very different kind. If a flash of light at one point is followed by a flash at another point after a very short time, about a twentieth of a second, the two lights appear to us simultaneous. The first light is still fully visible when the second flashes, and it cannot be noticed that the second comes later than the first. If now in the same short time interval the first light moves toward the second point, we should expect that we would see the whole process as a lighted line at rest, inasmuch as the beginning and the end point appear simultaneous, if the end is reached less than a twentieth of a second after the starting point. But the experiment shows the opposite result. Instead of the expected lighted line, we see in this case an actual movement from one point to the other. Again we must conclude that the movement is more than the mere seeing of successive positions, as in this case we see the movement, while the isolated positions do not appear as successive but as simultaneous.

We can also reach the same conclusion through very different kinds of experiments. If a flash of light appears at one spot and is followed by another flash at a different spot after a very short time—about a twentieth of a second—the two lights seem to us to happen at the same time. The first light is still clearly visible when the second one flashes, and we don’t notice that the second comes after the first. Now, if during that same short interval the first light moves toward the second point, we would expect to see the whole process as a stationary lighted line, since the starting and ending points appear simultaneous if the endpoint is reached less than a twentieth of a second after the starting point. But the experiment shows the opposite outcome. Instead of the expected lighted line, we actually see movement from one point to the other. Again, we must conclude that movement is more than just seeing successive positions; in this case, we see the movement itself, while the individual positions do not appear as successive but rather as simultaneous.

Another group of interesting phenomena of movement may be formed from those cases in which the moving object is more easily noticed than the impressions of the whole field through which the movement is carried out. We may overlook an area in our visual field, especially when it lies far to one side from our fixation point, but as soon as anything moves in that area our attention is drawn. We notice the movement more quickly than the whole background in which the movement is executed. The fluttering of kerchiefs at a far distance or the waving of flags for signaling is characteristic. All indicate that the movement is to us something different from merely seeing an object first at one and afterward at another place. We can easily find the analogy in other senses. If we touch our forehead or the back of our hand with two blunt compass points so that the two points are about a third of an inch distant from each other, we do not discriminate the two points as two, but we perceive the impression as that of one point. We cannot discriminate the one pressure point from the other. But if we move the point of a pencil to and fro from one point to the other we perceive distinctly the movement in spite of the fact that it is a movement between two end points which could not be discriminated. It is wholly characteristic that the experimenter in every field of sensations, visual or acoustical or tactual, often finds himself before the experience of having noticed a movement while he is unable to say in which direction the movement occurred.

Another group of interesting movement phenomena can be observed in situations where the moving object stands out more than the overall scene in which the movement occurs. We might ignore a part of our visual field, especially if it’s far away from where we’re looking, but as soon as something moves in that area, our attention is immediately captured. We notice the movement faster than the entire background surrounding it. For instance, the fluttering of scarves in the distance or the waving of flags for signaling are typical examples. These indicate that movement to us is something more than just seeing an object switch from one place to another. We can easily find a similar case in other senses. If we touch our forehead or the back of our hand with two dull compass tips so that the tips are about a third of an inch apart, we don’t recognize the two points as separate; we feel it as one point. We can't tell one pressure point from the other. However, if we move the tip of a pencil back and forth between the two points, we clearly perceive the movement even though it’s between two endpoints that we can't differentiate. It’s particularly interesting that in all sensory fields, whether visual, auditory, or tactile, the experimenter often has the experience of noticing movement but is unable to specify the direction in which the movement happened.

We are familiar with the illusions in which we believe that we see something which only our imagination supplies. If an unfamiliar printed word is exposed to our eye for the twentieth part of a second, we readily substitute a familiar word with similar letters. Everybody knows how difficult it is to read proofs. We overlook the misprints, that is, we replace the wrong letters which are actually in our field of vision by imaginary right letters which correspond to our expectations. Are we not also familiar with the experience of supplying by our fancy the associative image of a movement when only the starting point and the end point are given, if a skillful suggestion influences our mind. The prestidigitator stands on one side of the stage when he apparently throws the costly watch against the mirror on the other side of the stage; the audience sees his suggestive hand movement and the disappearance of the watch and sees twenty feet away the shattering of the mirror. The suggestible spectator cannot help seeing the flight of the watch across the stage.

We are aware of the illusions where we think we see something that our imagination created. If an unfamiliar printed word catches our eye for just a fraction of a second, we quickly replace it with a familiar word that has similar letters. Everyone knows how hard it is to read proofs. We ignore the typos, meaning we substitute the wrong letters in our line of sight with imaginary correct letters that align with our expectations. Aren’t we also familiar with the experience of filling in the imaginative image of a movement when only the starting and ending points are provided, especially if a clever suggestion influences our mind? The magician stands on one side of the stage when he seems to throw a valuable watch toward the mirror on the other side; the audience sees his suggestive hand movement and the watch disappearing, followed by the mirror shattering twenty feet away. The suggestible spectator can't help but envision the watch flying across the stage.

The recent experiments by Wertheimer and Korte have gone into still subtler details. Both experimenters worked with a delicate instrument in which two light lines on a dark ground could be exposed in very quick succession and in which it was possible to vary the position of the lines, the distance of the lines, the intensity of their light, the time exposure of each, and the time between the appearance of the first and of the second. They studied all these factors, and moreover the influence of differently directed attention and suggestive attitude. If a vertical line is immediately followed by a horizontal, the two together may give the impression of one right angle. If the time between the vertical and the horizontal line is long, first one and then the other is seen. But at a certain length of the time interval, a new effect is reached. We see the vertical line falling over and lying flat like the horizontal line. If the eyes are fixed on the point in the midst of the angle, we might expect that this movement phenomenon would stop, but the opposite is the case. The apparent movement from the vertical to the horizontal has to pass our fixation point and it seems that we ought now to recognize clearly that there is nothing between those two positions, that the intermediate phases of the movement are lacking; and yet the experiment shows that under these circumstances we frequently get the strongest impression of motion. If we use two horizontal lines, the one above the other, we see, if the right time interval is chosen, that the upper one moves downward toward the lower. But we can introduce there a very interesting variation. If we make the lower line, which appears objectively after the upper one, more intense, the total impression is one which begins with the lower. We see first the lower line moving toward the upper one which also approaches the lower; and then follows the second phase in which both appear to fall down to the position of the lower one. It is not necessary to go further into details in order to demonstrate that the apparent movement is in no way the mere result of an afterimage and that the impression of motion is surely more than the mere perception of successive phases of movement. The movement is in these cases not really seen from without, but is superadded, by the action of the mind, to motionless pictures.

The recent experiments by Wertheimer and Korte have delved into even finer details. Both researchers used a sensitive instrument that allowed two light lines on a dark background to be displayed in quick succession. They could change the position of the lines, the distance between them, the brightness of the light, the exposure time for each, and the time between the appearance of the first and second lines. They analyzed all these factors, as well as how different types of attention and suggestive attitudes affected perception. When a vertical line is immediately followed by a horizontal line, together they can create the impression of one right angle. If there’s a long delay between seeing the vertical and horizontal lines, they are perceived one after the other. However, with a certain length of time in between, a new effect occurs: the vertical line appears to fall over and lie flat like the horizontal line. If our gaze is fixed on the point where the two lines meet, we might think that this movement would stop, but the opposite happens. The apparent movement from the vertical to the horizontal continues past our fixation point, and we might expect to see clearly that there’s nothing between those two positions, that the intermediate stages of the movement are absent; yet the experiment shows that we often have the strongest impression of motion under these conditions. If we use two horizontal lines, one above the other, and choose the right time interval, we perceive the upper line moving downward toward the lower one. An interesting variation can be introduced: if we make the lower line, which appears to follow the upper one, brighter, the overall impression shifts, starting with the lower line. First, we see the lower line moving toward the upper line, which also seems to approach the lower; then we enter a second phase where both appear to fall down to where the lower line is. It's unnecessary to go into more details to show that the apparent movement is not simply the result of an afterimage. The impression of motion is definitely more than just the perception of successive phases of movement. In these cases, movement isn’t perceived from the outside; instead, it is added by the mind to stationary images.

The statement that our impression of movement does not result simply from the seeing of successive stages but includes a higher mental act into which the successive visual impressions enter merely as factors is in itself not really an explanation. We have not settled by it the nature of that higher central process. But it is enough for us to see that the impression of the continuity of the motion results from a complex mental process by which the various pictures are held together in the unity of a higher act. Nothing can characterize the situation more clearly than the fact which has been demonstrated by many experiments, namely, that this feeling of movement is in no way interfered with by the distinct consciousness that important phases of the movement are lacking. On the contrary, under certain circumstances we become still more fully aware of this apparent motion created by our inner activity when we are conscious of the interruptions between the various phases of movement.

The idea that our perception of movement doesn’t just come from seeing a series of steps but involves a more complex mental process where those visual impressions play a role isn’t really a complete explanation. It doesn’t clarify what that central process actually is. However, it’s clear that the sense of continuous motion comes from a complicated mental process that keeps various images unified in a higher act. Nothing illustrates this better than the fact, shown in many experiments, that this sense of movement is not disrupted by the clear awareness that some key parts of the motion are missing. In fact, under certain conditions, we become even more aware of this apparent motion created by our inner workings when we recognize the gaps between different phases of movement.

We come to the consequences. What is then the difference between seeing motion in the photoplay and seeing it on the real stage? There on the stage where the actors move the eye really receives a continuous series. Each position goes over into the next without any interruption. The spectator receives everything from without and the whole movement which he sees is actually going on in the world of space without and accordingly in his eye. But if he faces the film world, the motion which he sees appears to be a true motion, and yet is created by his own mind. The afterimages of the successive pictures are not sufficient to produce a substitute for the continuous outer stimulation; the essential condition is rather the inner mental activity which unites the separate phases in the idea of connected action. Thus we have reached the exact counterpart of our results when we analyzed the perception of depth. We see actual depth in the pictures, and yet we are every instant aware that it is not real depth and that the persons are not really plastic. It is only a suggestion of depth, a depth created by our own activity, but not actually seen, because essential conditions for the true perception of depth are lacking. Now we find that the movement too is perceived but that the eye does not receive the impressions of true movement. It is only a suggestion of movement, and the idea of motion is to a high degree the product of our own reaction. Depth and movement alike come to us in the moving picture world, not as hard facts but as a mixture of fact and symbol. They are present and yet they are not in the things. We invest the impressions with them. The theater has both depth and motion, without any subjective help; the screen has them and yet lacks them. We see things distant and moving, but we furnish to them more than we receive; we create the depth and the continuity through our mental mechanism.

We arrive at the outcomes. So what's the difference between seeing movement in films and seeing it on a live stage? On stage, where actors perform, the audience experiences a continuous flow. Each position seamlessly transitions into the next without any break. The viewer takes in everything from the outside, and the movement they see is genuinely happening in the physical space and in their own perception. However, when facing the film world, the motion they perceive seems like real motion, yet it's constructed by their mind. The afterimages from the successive frames aren't enough to mimic genuine continuous outer stimulation; the key factor is the internal mental activity that connects the separate moments into a cohesive idea of action. This brings us to a point that parallels our earlier analysis of depth perception. We can see actual depth in images, but we’re always aware that it’s not real depth, and the individuals aren’t truly three-dimensional. It’s merely a suggestion of depth, a depth created by our own efforts, yet not genuinely seen since the necessary conditions for real depth perception are absent. Now we discover that movement is perceived, but the eye doesn’t receive impressions of authentic movement. It’s only a suggestion of movement, and our concept of motion is largely shaped by our responses. Both depth and movement come to us in the world of moving pictures, not as solid realities but as a blend of fact and symbolism. They exist, yet they aren’t truly present in the visuals. We attribute those qualities to them. The theater has both depth and motion without needing subjective input; the screen offers them, yet they feel absent. We witness things that are distant and in motion, but we provide more than what we perceive; we generate the depth and continuity through our mental processes.

[1] Readers who have no technical interest in physiological psychology may omit Chapter III and turn directly to Chapter IV on Attention.

[1] Readers who aren't interested in the technical details of physiological psychology can skip Chapter III and go straight to Chapter IV on Attention.


CHAPTER IV

ATTENTION

The mere perception of the men and women and of the background, with all their depth and their motion, furnishes only the material. The scene which keeps our interest alive certainly involves much more than the simple impression of moving and distant objects. We must accompany those sights with a wealth of ideas. They must have a meaning for us, they must be enriched by our own imagination, they must awaken the remnants of earlier experiences, they must stir up our feelings and emotions, they must play on our suggestibility, they must start ideas and thoughts, they must be linked in our mind with the continuous chain of the play, and they must draw our attention constantly to the important and essential element of the action. An abundance of such inner processes must meet the world of impressions and the psychological analysis has only started when perception of depth and movement alone are considered. If we hear Chinese, we perceive the sounds, but there is no inner response to the words; they are meaningless and dead for us; we have no interest in them. If we hear the same thoughts expressed in our mother tongue, every syllable carries its meaning and message. Then we are readily inclined to fancy that this additional significance which belongs to the familiar language and which is absent from the foreign one is something which comes to us in the perception itself as if the meaning too were passing through the channels of our ears. But psychologically the meaning is ours. In learning the language we have learned to add associations and reactions of our own to the sounds which we perceive. It is not different with the optical perceptions. The best does not come from without.

The simple sight of the men and women and their surroundings, with all their depth and movement, only provides the basic material. The scene that keeps our interest alive involves much more than just the impression of moving, distant objects. We need to accompany those visuals with a wealth of ideas. They need to hold meaning for us, should be enriched by our imagination, must evoke memories of past experiences, and should stir up our feelings and emotions. They should connect with our suggestibility, spark ideas and thoughts, be linked in our minds with the ongoing storyline, and continually draw our attention to the important and essential elements of the action. A wealth of these inner processes must engage with the world of impressions, and psychological analysis only begins when we consider depth and movement alone. If we hear Chinese, we perceive the sounds, but there’s no inner response to the words; they are meaningless and lifeless to us; we have no interest in them. When we hear the same thoughts expressed in our native language, every syllable carries its meaning and message. Then, we tend to think that this added significance from our familiar language, which is missing from the foreign one, comes from the perception itself, as if the meaning is flowing through our ears. But psychologically, the meaning belongs to us. By learning the language, we have learned to add our own associations and reactions to the sounds we perceive. The same goes for visual perceptions. The best doesn’t come from the outside.

Of all internal functions which create the meaning of the world around us, the most central is the attention. The chaos of the surrounding impressions is organized into a real cosmos of experience by our selection of that which is significant and of consequence. This is true for life and stage alike. Our attention must be drawn now here, now there, if we want to bind together that which is scattered in the space before us. Everything must be shaded by attention and inattention. Whatever is focused by our attention wins emphasis and irradiates meaning over the course of events. In practical life we discriminate between voluntary and involuntary attention. We call it voluntary if we approach the impressions with an idea in our mind as to what we want to focus our attention on. We carry our personal interest, our own idea into the observation of the objects. Our attention has chosen its aim beforehand, and we ignore all that does not fulfil this specific interest. All our working is controlled by such voluntary attention. We have the idea of the goal which we want to reach in our mind beforehand and subordinate all which we meet to this selective energy. Through our voluntary attention we seek something and accept the offering of the surroundings only in so far as it brings us what we are seeking.

Of all the internal processes that shape our understanding of the world around us, attention is the most important. The chaos of the impressions we encounter is organized into a real tapestry of experience by our choice of that is significant and meaningful. This applies to both life and performance. Our attention needs to shift from one thing to another if we want to piece together what’s scattered in our environment. Everything must be influenced by what we pay attention to and what we ignore. Whatever we focus on gains importance and adds meaning to the events that unfold. In our daily lives, we make a distinction between voluntary and involuntary attention. We consider it voluntary when we approach what we see with a clear idea of what we want to focus on. We bring our personal interests and our own ideas into our observation of things. Our attention has set its target in advance, and we overlook anything that doesn’t meet this specific interest. All our actions are guided by this voluntary attention. We have a clear goal in mind that we want to achieve, and we filter everything we encounter based on this selective focus. Through our voluntary attention, we seek something and only engage with our surroundings to the extent that they provide what we are looking for.

It is quite different with the involuntary attention. The guiding influence here comes from without. The cue for the focusing of our attention lies in the events which we perceive. What is loud and shining and unusual attracts our involuntary attention. We must turn our mind to a place where an explosion occurs, we must read the glaring electric signs which flash up. To be sure, the perceptions which force themselves on our involuntary attention may get their motive power from our own reactions. Everything which appeals to our natural instincts, everything which stirs up hope or fear, enthusiasm or indignation, or any strong emotional excitement will get control of our attention. But in spite of this circuit through our emotional responses the starting point lies without and our attention is accordingly of the involuntary type. In our daily activity voluntary and involuntary attention are always intertwined. Our life is a great compromise between that which our voluntary attention aims at and that which the aims of the surrounding world force on our involuntary attention.

It’s quite different with involuntary attention. The guiding influence here comes from outside. The trigger for focusing our attention lies in the events we notice. What is loud, bright, and unusual grabs our involuntary attention. We have to direct our mind to where an explosion happens, and we must read the flashing electric signs. Sure, the perceptions that demand our involuntary attention might get their energy from our own reactions. Anything that appeals to our natural instincts, anything that stirs hope or fear, enthusiasm or anger, or any strong emotional response will capture our attention. But despite this loop through our emotions, the starting point is external, so our attention is indeed of the involuntary kind. In our daily lives, voluntary and involuntary attention are always mixed together. Our life is a big compromise between what our voluntary attention seeks and what the surrounding world forces onto our involuntary attention.

How does the theater performance differ in this respect from life? Might we not say that voluntary attention is eliminated from the sphere of art and that the audience is necessarily following the lead of an attention which receives all its cues from the work of art itself and which therefore acts involuntarily? To be sure, we may approach a theater performance with a voluntary purpose of our own. For instance, we may be interested in a particular actor and may watch him with our opera glass all the time whenever he is on the stage, even in scenes in which his rôle is insignificant and in which the artistic interest ought to belong to the other actors. But such voluntary selection has evidently nothing to do with the theater performance as such. By such behavior we break the spell in which the artistic drama ought to hold us. We disregard the real shadings of the play and by mere personal side interests put emphasis where it does not belong. If we really enter into the spirit of the play, our attention is constantly drawn in accordance with the intentions of the producers.

How is the theater performance different from real life in this way? Can we not say that voluntary attention is removed from art, and the audience is inevitably following an attention that takes all its cues from the artwork itself, acting involuntarily? Certainly, we might approach a theater performance with our own voluntary intentions. For example, we might be interested in a specific actor and watch him through our opera glasses whenever he’s on stage, even in scenes where his role is minor and where the artistic focus should be on the other actors. But this kind of voluntary focus clearly has nothing to do with the theater performance itself. By doing this, we break the spell that the artistic drama is meant to cast on us. We overlook the true nuances of the play and shift the focus to our personal interests, which isn’t appropriate. If we truly immerse ourselves in the essence of the play, our attention is continually guided by the creators’ intentions.

Surely the theater has no lack of means to draw this involuntary attention to any important point. To begin with, the actor who speaks holds our attention more strongly than the actors who at that time are silent. Yet the contents of the words may direct our interest to anybody else on the stage. We watch him whom the words accuse, or betray or delight. But the mere interest springing from words cannot in the least explain that constantly shifting action of our involuntary attention during a theater performance. The movements of the actors are essential. The pantomime without words can take the place of the drama and still appeal to us with overwhelming power. The actor who comes to the foreground of the stage is at once in the foreground of our consciousness. He who lifts his arm while the others stand quiet has gained our attention. Above all, every gesture, every play of the features, brings order and rhythm into the manifoldness of the impressions and organizes them for our mind. Again, the quick action, the unusual action, the repeated action, the unexpected action, the action with strong outer effect, will force itself on our mind and unbalance the mental equilibrium.

Surely the theater has plenty of ways to draw our involuntary attention to any important point. To start with, the actor who is speaking grabs our focus more strongly than the actors who are currently silent. However, the content of the words can direct our interest to anyone else on the stage. We watch the person whom the words accuse, betray, or delight. But the interest generated by the words alone cannot fully explain the constantly shifting focus of our involuntary attention during a theater performance. The movements of the actors are crucial. Pantomime can replace dialogue and still resonate with us powerfully. The actor who steps into the spotlight is instantly at the forefront of our awareness. The one who raises their arm while the others remain still has captured our attention. Above all, every gesture and every expression brings order and rhythm to the complexity of what we perceive and organizes it for our understanding. Moreover, quick actions, unusual actions, repeated actions, unexpected actions, and actions with a strong visual impact will demand our attention and disrupt our mental balance.

The question arises: how does the photoplay secure the needed shifting of attention? Here, too, involuntary attention alone can be expected. An attention which undertakes its explorations guided by preconceived ideas instead of yielding to the demands of the play would lack adjustment to its task. We might sit through the photoplay with the voluntary intention of watching the pictures with a scientific interest in order to detect some mechanical traits of the camera, or with a practical interest, in order to look up some new fashions, or with a professional interest, in order to find out in what New England scenery these pictures of Palestine might have been photographed. But none of these aspects has anything to do with the photoplay. If we follow the play in a genuine attitude of theatrical interest, we must accept those cues for our attention which the playwright and the producers have prepared for us. But there is surely no lack of means by which our mind can be influenced and directed in the rapid play of the pictures.

The question comes up: how does the movie keep our attention shifting? In this case, only involuntary attention can be expected. Attention that explores based on preconceived ideas, rather than responding to what the film demands, would struggle to connect with its purpose. We might watch the movie with the intention of observing it scientifically to notice some mechanical aspects of the camera, or with a practical interest to check out some new fashion trends, or with a professional focus to see what New England scenery might have been used for the filming of these Palestine scenes. But none of these angles really relate to the movie itself. If we engage with the film in a true spirit of theatrical interest, we need to follow the cues for our attention that the playwright and producers have set up for us. However, there are definitely plenty of ways our minds can be influenced and directed in the fast-paced sequence of images.

Of course the spoken word is lacking. We know how often the words on the screen serve as substitutes for the speech of the actors. They appear sometimes as so-called "leaders" between the pictures, sometimes even thrown into the picture itself, sometimes as content of a written letter or of a telegram or of a newspaper clipping which is projected like a picture, strongly enlarged, on the screen. In all these cases the words themselves prescribe the line in which the attention must move and force the interest of the spectator toward the new goal. But such help by the writing on the wall is, after all, extraneous to the original character of the photoplay. As long as we study the psychological effect of the moving pictures themselves, we must concentrate our inquiry on the moving pictures as such and not on that which the playwright does for the interpretation of the pictures. It may be granted that the letters and newspaper articles take a middle place. They are a part of the picture, but their influence on the spectator is, nevertheless, very similar to that of the leaders. We are here concerned only with what the pictorial offering contains. We must therefore also disregard the accompanying music or the imitative noises which belong to the technique of the full-fledged photoplay nowadays. They do not a little to push the attention hither and thither. Yet they are accessory, while the primary power must lie in the content of the pictures themselves.

Of course, spoken language has its limitations. We often see how the words on the screen act as substitutes for the actors' dialogue. They sometimes appear as so-called "leaders" between scenes, at times even integrated into the scene itself, or presented as part of a written letter, a telegram, or a newspaper clipping projected like an image, considerably enlarged on the screen. In all these situations, the words direct where the viewer's attention should go and guide their interest toward a new focus. However, this text on the screen is ultimately separate from the true essence of a film. As long as we examine the psychological impact of the moving images themselves, we need to focus our investigation on the films as they are and not on what the playwright adds to interpret them. It's true that letters and newspaper articles occupy a middle ground. They are part of the visual experience, but their effect on the viewer is still very much like that of the leaders. Here, we are only looking at what the visual content offers. Therefore, we must also ignore the background music or sound effects that are part of today's complete film experience. They can definitely shift attention around. However, they are secondary; the main impact must reside in the content of the images themselves.

But it is evident that with the exception of the words, no means for drawing attention which is effective on the theater stage is lost in the photoplay. All the directing influences which the movements of the actors exert can be felt no less when they are pictured in the films. More than that, the absence of the words brings the movements which we see to still greater prominence in our mind. Our whole attention can now be focused on the play of the face and of the hands. Every gesture and every mimic excitement stirs us now much more than if it were only the accompaniment of speech. Moreover, the technical conditions of the kinematograph show favor the importance of the movement. First the play on the screen is acted more rapidly than that on the stage. By the absence of speech everything is condensed, the whole rhythm is quickened, a greater pressure of time is applied, and through that the accents become sharper and the emphasis more powerful for the attention. But secondly the form of the stage intensifies the impression made by those who move toward the foreground. The theater stage is broadest near the footlights and becomes narrower toward the background; the moving picture stage is narrowest in front and becomes wider toward the background. This is necessary because its width is controlled by the angle at which the camera takes the picture. The camera is the apex of an angle which encloses a breadth of only a few feet in the nearest photographic distance, while it may include a width of miles in the far distant landscape. Whatever comes to the foreground therefore gains strongly in relative importance over its surroundings. Moving away from the camera means a reduction much greater than a mere stepping to the background on the theater stage. Furthermore lifeless things have much more chance for movements in the moving pictures than on the stage and their motions, too, can contribute toward the right setting of the attention.

But it’s clear that aside from the dialogue, no effective means of grabbing attention used on stage is lost in film. The directing influences from the actors' movements can still be felt when they're captured on screen. In fact, the lack of spoken words makes the movements we see stand out even more in our minds. We can fully focus on the expressions and gestures. Every movement and facial expression affects us much more than if it were just part of a conversation. Additionally, the technical aspects of film favor the significance of motion. First, the action on screen happens more quickly than on stage. Without dialogue, everything is condensed; the rhythm speeds up, time feels more compressed, and the emphasis becomes sharper, grabbing our attention more powerfully. Second, the stage design amplifies the impression of those moving toward the front. The theater stage is widest near the front and narrows toward the back, while in film, the stage is narrowest at the front and widens as it recedes. This is essential because the width is determined by the camera’s angle. The camera forms a point from which it captures only a few feet of width up close, but can encompass miles in the distance. As a result, anything that moves closer to the camera significantly increases in importance compared to its surroundings. Moving away from the camera has a much greater impact than just stepping back on a theater stage. Moreover, in films, inanimate objects have more opportunities for movement than they do on stage, and their actions can also help direct our focus.

But we know from the theater that movement is not the only condition which makes us focus our interest on a particular element of the play. An unusual face, a queer dress, a gorgeous costume or a surprising lack of costume, a quaint piece of decoration, may attract our mind and even hold it spellbound for a while. Such means can not only be used but can be carried to a much stronger climax of efficiency by the unlimited means of the moving pictures. This is still more true of the power of setting or background. The painted landscape of the stage can hardly compete with the wonders of nature and culture when the scene of the photoplay is laid in the supreme landscapes of the world. Wide vistas are opened, the woods and the streams, the mountain valleys and the ocean, are before us with the whole strength of reality; and yet in rapid change which does not allow the attention to become fatigued.

But we know from theater that movement isn’t the only thing that makes us focus our interest on a particular element of the play. An unusual face, a quirky outfit, a stunning costume or a surprising lack of one, a unique piece of decoration, can capture our attention and even keep it for a while. These methods can not only be used but can be taken to a much stronger level of effectiveness through the limitless possibilities of motion pictures. This is even more true for the impact of setting or background. The painted landscape of the stage can hardly compete with the wonders of nature and culture when the scene of the film is set in the breathtaking landscapes of the world. Wide views open up, and the woods, streams, mountain valleys, and ocean are all before us with the full strength of reality; yet in rapid changes that prevent our attention from getting tired.

Finally the mere formal arrangement of the succeeding pictures may keep our attention in control, and here again are possibilities which are superior to those of the solid theater stage. At the theater no effect of formal arrangement can give exactly the same impression to the spectators in every part of the house. The perspective of the wings and the other settings and their relation to the persons and to the background can never appear alike from the front and from the rear, from the left and from the right side, from the orchestra and from the balcony, while the picture which the camera has fixated is the same from every corner of the picture palace. The greatest skill and refinement can be applied to make the composition serviceable to the needs of attention. The spectator may not and ought not to be aware that the lines of the background, the hangings of the room, the curves of the furniture, the branches of the trees, the forms of the mountains, help to point toward the figure of the woman who is to hold his mind. The shading of the lights, the patches of dark shadows, the vagueness of some parts, the sharp outlines of others, the quietness of some parts of the picture as against the vehement movement of others all play on the keyboard of our mind and secure the desired effect on our involuntary attention.

Finally, the simple arrangement of the following images can keep our attention in check, and once again, there are possibilities here that are better than those of a traditional theater stage. In a theater, no arrangement can give the same impression to everyone in the audience. The perspective of the wings and other settings, and how they relate to the characters and the background, can never look quite the same from the front and back, from the left and right, from the orchestra and from the balcony. However, the image captured by the camera is the same from every angle in the cinema. The greatest skill and attention can be used to make the composition work for our attention. The viewer may not—and shouldn’t—notice that the lines of the background, the drapes in the room, the curves of the furniture, the branches of the trees, and the shapes of the mountains all guide focus toward the figure of the woman meant to engage their mind. The play of light and shadow, the spots of darkness, the blur in some areas, the sharp outlines in others, and the stillness in parts of the image contrasting with the active movement in others all engage our minds and achieve the intended effect on our involuntary attention.

But if all is admitted, we still have not touched on the most important and most characteristic relation of the photoplay pictures to the attention of the audience; and here we reach a sphere in which any comparison with the stage of the theater would be in vain. What is attention? What are the essential processes in the mind when we turn our attention to one face in the crowd, to one little flower in the wide landscape? It would be wrong to describe the process in the mind by reference to one change alone. If we have to give an account of the act of attention, as seen by the modern psychologist, we ought to point to several coördinated features. They are not independent of one another but are closely interrelated. We may say that whatever attracts our attention in the sphere of any sense, sight or sound, touch or smell, surely becomes more vivid and more clear in our consciousness. This does not at all mean that it becomes more intense. A faint light to which we turn our attention does not become the strong light of an incandescent lamp. No, it remains the faint, just perceptible streak of lightness, but it has grown more impressive, more distinct, more clear in its details, more vivid. It has taken a stronger hold of us or, as we may say by a metaphor, it has come into the center of our consciousness.

But even if we acknowledge everything so far, we still haven’t addressed the most crucial and distinctive relationship between film and the audience's attention. This is where any comparison to theater falls short. What is attention? What processes occur in our minds when we focus on one face in a crowd or one small flower in a vast landscape? It’s inadequate to describe this mental process by referring to just one change. To explain the act of attention, as understood by modern psychologists, we need to highlight several interconnected aspects. They aren’t independent; they’re closely linked. We can say that anything that captures our attention—whether through sight, sound, touch, or smell—becomes more vivid and clearer in our awareness. However, this doesn’t mean it becomes more intense. A faint light that we focus on doesn’t turn into the bright light of an incandescent bulb. Instead, it remains the same faint, barely noticeable light, but it becomes more impactful, more distinct, clearer in its details, and more vivid. It takes a stronger hold on us; in a metaphorical sense, it moves to the center of our consciousness.

But this involves a second aspect which is surely no less important. While the attended impression becomes more vivid, all the other impressions become less vivid, less clear, less distinct, less detailed. They fade away. We no longer notice them. They have no hold on our mind, they disappear. If we are fully absorbed in our book, we do not hear at all what is said around us and we do not see the room; we forget everything. Our attention to the page of the book brings with it our lack of attention to everything else. We may add a third factor. We feel that our body adjusts itself to the perception. Our head enters into the movement of listening for the sound, our eyes are fixating the point in the outer world. We hold all our muscles in tension in order to receive the fullest possible impression with our sense organs. The lens in our eye is accommodated exactly to the correct distance. In short our bodily personality works toward the fullest possible impression. But this is supplemented by a fourth factor. Our ideas and feelings and impulses group themselves around the attended object. It becomes the starting point for our actions while all the other objects in the sphere of our senses lose their grip on our ideas and feelings. These four factors are intimately related to one another. As we are passing along the street we see something in the shop window and as soon as it stirs up our interest, our body adjusts itself, we stop, we fixate it, we get more of the detail in it, the lines become sharper, and while it impresses us more vividly than before the street around us has lost its vividness and clearness.

But this brings up a second aspect that is definitely just as important. While the focused impression becomes more vivid, all the other impressions become less vivid, less clear, less distinct, and less detailed. They fade away. We no longer notice them. They don’t capture our attention; they vanish. When we're completely absorbed in our book, we don't hear what’s happening around us and we don’t see the room; we forget everything. Our focus on the page means we're not paying attention to anything else. We can also add a third factor. We feel our body adjusting to the perception. Our head leans in to listen for the sound, our eyes fixate on a point in the outside world. We tense our muscles to fully receive the impression with our senses. The lens in our eye is perfectly adjusted to the correct distance. In short, our bodily selves work towards achieving the fullest impression possible. But this is accompanied by a fourth factor. Our thoughts, feelings, and impulses cluster around the focused object. It becomes the starting point for our actions while all the other objects in our sensory sphere lose their hold on our thoughts and feelings. These four factors are closely interconnected. As we walk down the street, we see something in the shop window, and as soon as it captures our interest, our body adjusts, we stop, we fixate on it, we take in more details, the lines become sharper, and while it impresses us more vividly than before, the street around us has become less vivid and clear.

If on the stage the hand movements of the actor catch our interest, we no longer look at the whole large scene, we see only the fingers of the hero clutching the revolver with which he is to commit his crime. Our attention is entirely given up to the passionate play of his hand. It becomes the central point for all our emotional responses. We do not see the hands of any other actor in the scene. Everything else sinks into a general vague background, while that one hand shows more and more details. The more we fixate it, the more its clearness and distinctness increase. From this one point wells our emotion, and our emotion again concentrates our senses on this one point. It is as if this one hand were during this pulse beat of events the whole scene, and everything else had faded away. On the stage this is impossible; there nothing can really fade away. That dramatic hand must remain, after all, only the ten thousandth part of the space of the whole stage; it must remain a little detail. The whole body of the hero and the other men and the whole room and every indifferent chair and table in it must go on obtruding themselves on our senses. What we do not attend cannot be suddenly removed from the stage. Every change which is needed must be secured by our own mind. In our consciousness the attended hand must grow and the surrounding room must blur. But the stage cannot help us. The art of the theater has there its limits.

If on stage the actor's hand movements grab our attention, we stop looking at the entire scene and focus only on the hero's fingers gripping the revolver he's about to use for his crime. Our full attention is consumed by the passionate movement of his hand. It becomes the main point for all our emotional reactions. We don’t notice the hands of any other actor on stage. Everything else fades into a vague background, while that one hand reveals more and more details. The more we concentrate on it, the clearer and more defined it becomes. From this single point, our emotions spring forth, and those emotions again direct our senses to that same spot. It’s as if that hand represents the entire scene in that moment, and everything else has disappeared. On stage, this isn’t really possible; nothing can actually fade away. That dramatic hand must always remain just a tiny part of the overall stage space; it must stay a small detail. The entire body of the hero, the other men, the whole room, and every nondescript chair and table must continue to press upon our senses. What we ignore can’t just vanish from the stage. Every necessary change must be realized by our own minds. In our consciousness, the focused hand must grow while the surrounding room blurs. But the stage can’t assist us. The art of theater has its boundaries there.

Here begins the art of the photoplay. That one nervous hand which feverishly grasps the deadly weapon can suddenly for the space of a breath or two become enlarged and be alone visible on the screen, while everything else has really faded into darkness. The act of attention which goes on in our mind has remodeled the surrounding itself. The detail which is being watched has suddenly become the whole content of the performance, and everything which our mind wants to disregard has been suddenly banished from our sight and has disappeared. The events without have become obedient to the demands of our consciousness. In the language of the photoplay producers it is a "close-up." The close-up has objectified in our world of perception our mental act of attention and by it has furnished art with a means which far transcends the power of any theater stage.

Here begins the art of the photoplay. That one nervous hand that tightly grips the deadly weapon can suddenly, for just a moment, become enlarged and be the only thing visible on the screen, while everything else fades into darkness. The focus of our mind reshapes the surrounding environment. The detail we’re watching has suddenly become the entire essence of the performance, and everything our mind wants to ignore has been abruptly removed from our view and has vanished. The events around us become responsive to our consciousness's demands. In the terminology of photoplay producers, this is a "close-up." The close-up has brought into our perception our mental act of attention and has provided art with a means that far surpasses the capabilities of any theater stage.

The scheme of the close-up was introduced into the technique of the film play rather late, but it has quickly gained a secure position. The more elaborate the production, the more frequent and the more skillful the use of this new and artistic means. The melodrama can hardly be played without it, unless a most inartistic use of printed words is made. The close-up has to furnish the explanations. If a little locket is hung on the neck of the stolen or exchanged infant, it is not necessary to tell us in words that everything will hinge on this locket twenty years later when the girl is grown up. If the ornament at the child's throat is at once shown in a close-up where everything has disappeared and only its quaint form appears much enlarged on the screen, we fix it in our imagination and know that we must give our fullest attention to it, as it will play a decisive part in the next reel. The gentleman criminal who draws his handkerchief from his pocket and with it a little bit of paper which falls down on the rug unnoticed by him has no power to draw our attention to that incriminating scrap. The device hardly belongs in the theater because the audience would not notice it any more than would the scoundrel himself. It would not be able to draw the attention. But in the film it is a favorite trick. At the moment the bit of paper falls, we see it greatly enlarged on the rug, while everything else has faded away, and we read on it that it is a ticket from the railway station at which the great crime was committed. Our attention is focused on it and we know that it will be decisive for the development of the action.

The close-up technique was adopted in filmmaking relatively late, but it quickly established itself as a staple. The more complex the production, the more frequently and skillfully this new artistic tool is used. Melodrama is almost impossible to perform without it, unless the script relies heavily on clunky dialogue. The close-up provides the necessary context. If a small locket is around the neck of a stolen or swapped baby, we don't need to be told in words that this locket will be crucial twenty years later when the girl grows up. If the locket is shown in a close-up while everything else fades away and only its unique shape is magnified on the screen, we remember it and understand that we need to pay close attention, as it will play a significant role in the next scene. The gentleman criminal who pulls a handkerchief from his pocket, accidentally dropping a small piece of paper on the rug without noticing, fails to draw our attention to that vital clue. This technique doesn’t really belong on stage because the audience wouldn't notice it any more than the criminal would. It wouldn't capture attention. But in film, it's a popular trick. At the moment the paper drops, we see it enlarged on the rug while everything else fades away, and we can read that it’s a ticket from the train station where the big crime happened. Our focus is directed toward it, and we realize it will be crucial for the plot's progression.

A clerk buys a newspaper on the street, glances at it and is shocked. Suddenly we see that piece of news with our own eyes. The close-up magnifies the headlines of the paper so that they fill the whole screen. But it is not necessary that this focusing of the attention should refer to levers in the plot. Any subtle detail, any significant gesture which heightens the meaning of the action may enter into the center of our consciousness by monopolizing the stage for a few seconds. There is love in her smiling face, and yet we overlook it as they stand in a crowded room. But suddenly, only for three seconds, all the others in the room have disappeared, the bodies of the lovers themselves have faded away, and only his look of longing and her smile of yielding reach out to us. The close-up has done what no theater could have offered by its own means, though we might have approached the effect in the theater performance if we had taken our opera glass and had directed it only to those two heads. But by doing so we should have emancipated ourselves from the offering of the stage picture, that is, the concentration and focusing were secured by us and not by the performance. In the photoplay it is the opposite.

A clerk buys a newspaper on the street, glances at it, and is shocked. Suddenly, we see that piece of news for ourselves. The close-up magnifies the headlines of the paper so that they fill the entire screen. But this focus doesn’t have to relate to the plot’s key events. Any subtle detail or meaningful gesture that enhances the action’s significance can take center stage for a few seconds. There’s love in her smiling face, yet we overlook it as they stand in a crowded room. But suddenly, for just three seconds, everyone else in the room vanishes, the bodies of the lovers themselves fade away, and only his longing gaze and her inviting smile connect with us. The close-up achieves what no theater could offer on its own, although we might have come close during a live performance if we had used opera glasses and focused solely on those two faces. However, by doing that, we would have removed ourselves from the stage's presentation, meaning we would have taken control of the focus instead of the performance itself. In film, it’s the other way around.

Have we not reached by this analysis of the close-up a point very near to that to which the study of depth perception and movement perception was leading? We saw that the moving pictures give us the plastic world and the moving world, and that nevertheless the depth and the motion in it are not real, unlike the depth and motion of the stage. We find now that the reality of the action in the photoplay in still another respect lacks objective independence, because it yields to our subjective play of attention. Wherever our attention becomes focused on a special feature, the surrounding adjusts itself, eliminates everything in which we are not interested, and by the close-up heightens the vividness of that on which our mind is concentrated. It is as if that outer world were woven into our mind and were shaped not through its own laws but by the acts of our attention.

Have we not, through this analysis of the close-up, reached a point very close to what the study of depth perception and motion perception was indicating? We observed that moving pictures present us with a three-dimensional world and a dynamic world, yet the depth and motion within them are not real, unlike the depth and motion on stage. We now find that the reality of the action in the film also lacks objective independence because it responds to our subjective focus of attention. Wherever our attention becomes directed towards a particular feature, the surroundings adapt, removing everything that doesn't catch our interest, and through the close-up, intensifying the clarity of what our mind is fixated on. It’s as if that external world becomes interwoven with our thoughts and is shaped not by its own rules but by the focus of our attention.


CHAPTER V

MEMORY AND IMAGINATION

When we sit in a real theater and see the stage with its depth and watch the actors moving and turn our attention hither and thither, we feel that those impressions from behind the footlights have objective character, while the action of our attention is subjective. Those men and things come from without but the play of the attention starts from within. Yet our attention, as we have seen, does not really add anything to the impressions of the stage. It makes some more vivid and clear while others become vague or fade away, but through the attention alone no content enters our consciousness. Wherever our attention may wander on the stage, whatever we experience comes to us through the channels of our senses. The spectator in the audience, however, does experience more than merely the light and sound sensations which fall on the eye and ear at that moment. He may be entirely fascinated by the actions on the stage and yet his mind may be overflooded with other ideas. Only one of their sources, but not the least important one, is the memory.

When we sit in a real theater and see the stage with its depth and watch the actors moving while directing our attention here and there, we feel that those impressions coming from beyond the footlights have an objective quality, while the focus of our attention is subjective. Those actors and elements come from outside, but the focus of our attention originates from within. Yet, as we’ve seen, our attention doesn’t actually add anything to the impressions of the stage. It can make some moments more vivid and clear, while others become vague or fade away, but through attention alone, no new content enters our consciousness. Wherever our focus wanders on the stage, everything we experience comes to us through our senses. However, the spectator in the audience experiences more than just the light and sound sensations hitting the eye and ear at that moment. They may be completely captivated by the actions on stage, yet their mind may be overwhelmed with other thoughts. One of the sources of these thoughts, though not the least important, is memory.

Indeed the action of the memory brings to the mind of the audience ever so much which gives fuller meaning and ampler setting to every scene—yes, to every word and movement on the stage. To think of the most trivial case, at every point of the drama we must remember what happened in the previous scenes. The first act is no longer on the stage when we see the second. The second alone is now our sense impression. Yet this second act is in itself meaningless if it is not supported by the first. Hence the first must somehow be in our consciousness. At least in every important scene we must remember those situations of the preceding act which can throw light on the new developments. We see the young missionary in his adventures on his perilous journey and we remember how in the preceding act we saw him in his peaceful cottage surrounded by the love of his parents and sisters and how they mourned when he left them behind. The more exciting the dangers he passes through in the far distant land, the more strongly does our memory carry us back to the home scenes which we witnessed before. The theater cannot do more than suggest to our memory this looking backward. The young hero may call this reminiscence back to our consciousness by his speech and his prayer, and when he fights his way through the jungles of Africa and the savages attack him, the melodrama may put words into his mouth which force us to think fervently of those whom he has left behind. But, after all, it is our own material of memory ideas which supplies the picture. The theater cannot go further. The photoplay can. We see the jungle, we see the hero at the height of his danger; and suddenly there flashes upon the screen a picture of the past. For not more than two seconds does the idyllic New England scene slip into the exciting African events. When one deep breath is over we are stirred again by the event of the present. That home scene of the past flitted by just as a hasty thought of bygone days darts through the mind.

Indeed, the action of memory brings to the audience's mind so much that adds deeper meaning and a broader context to every scene—yes, to every word and movement on stage. Take the simplest example: at every point in the drama, we must remember what happened in earlier scenes. The first act is no longer on stage when we see the second act. Only the second act is our current impression. Yet, the second act itself is meaningless without the foundation of the first. Therefore, the first act must somehow be in our awareness. At least in every key scene, we must recall the situations from the previous act that illuminate the new developments. We see the young missionary on his adventurous and dangerous journey and remember how in the previous act, he was in his peaceful cottage surrounded by the love of his parents and sisters, who mourned when he left them behind. The more dangerous situations he faces in the distant land, the more strongly our memory takes us back to those home scenes we witnessed earlier. The theater can only hint at this backward reflection. The young hero may bring this reminiscence to our minds through his speech and prayers, and when he battles through the jungles of Africa and is attacked by savages, the melodrama may put words in his mouth that compel us to think of those he left behind. But ultimately, it's our own memories that create the picture. The theater can’t go further than that. The film can. We see the jungle, we see the hero in the midst of danger, and suddenly, a picture of the past flashes on the screen. For just a couple of seconds, the peaceful New England scene blends into the exciting African events. Once that brief moment passes, we’re back to the present action. That past home scene zipped by like a fleeting thought of old memories.

The modern photoartist makes use of this technical device in an abundance of forms. In his slang any going back to an earlier scene is called a "cut-back." The cut-back may have many variations and serve many purposes. But the one which we face here is psychologically the most interesting. We have really an objectivation of our memory function. The case of the cut-back is there quite parallel to that of the close-up. In the one we recognize the mental act of attending, in the other we must recognize the mental act of remembering. In both cases the act which in the ordinary theater would go on in our mind alone is here in the photoplay projected into the pictures themselves. It is as if reality has lost its own continuous connection and become shaped by the demands of our soul. It is as if the outer world itself became molded in accordance with our fleeting turns of attention or with our passing memory ideas.

The modern photo artist uses this technical device in a variety of ways. In his lingo, going back to an earlier scene is called a "cut-back." The cut-back can take many forms and serve different purposes. However, the one we're focusing on here is the most psychologically intriguing. It really reflects how our memory works. The cut-back is quite similar to the close-up shot. In one, we recognize the mental act of focusing, while in the other, we acknowledge the mental act of recalling. In both cases, what usually happens in our mind during a typical theater experience is visually represented in the film itself. It’s as if reality has lost its continuous flow and is reshaped by our emotional needs. It feels as though the outside world is molded based on our shifting attention or our fleeting memories.

It is only another version of the same principle when the course of events is interrupted by forward glances. The mental function involved is that of expectation or, when the expectation is controlled by our feelings, we may class it under the mental function of imagination. The melodrama shows us how the young millionaire wastes his nights in a dissipated life, and when he drinks his blasphemous toast at a champagne feast with shameless women, we suddenly see on the screen the vision of twenty years later when the bartender of a most miserable saloon pushes the penniless tramp out into the gutter. The last act in the theater may bring us to such an ending, but there it can come only in the regular succession of events. That pitiful ending cannot be shown to us when life is still blooming and when a twenty years' downward course is still to be interpreted. There only our own imagination can anticipate how the mill of life may grind. In the photoplay our imagination is projected on the screen. With an uncanny contrast that ultimate picture of defeat breaks in where victory seems most glorious; and five seconds later the story of youth and rapture streams on. Again we see the course of the natural events remolded by the power of the mind. The theater can picture only how the real occurrences might follow one another; the photoplay can overcome the interval of the future as well as the interval of the past and slip the day twenty years hence between this minute and the next. In short, it can act as our imagination acts. It has the mobility of our ideas which are not controlled by the physical necessity of outer events but by the psychological laws for the association of ideas. In our mind past and future become intertwined with the present. The photoplay obeys the laws of the mind rather than those of the outer world.

It’s just another version of the same idea when events are interrupted by looking ahead. The mental process at play is expectation, or when our feelings control that expectation, we might categorize it as imagination. The melodrama illustrates how the young millionaire squanders his nights in a hedonistic lifestyle, and when he raises his irreverent toast at a champagne party with shameless women, we suddenly see a vision of twenty years later, when the bartender of a dingy bar shoves a broke homeless man into the gutter. The final act in a play might take us to such an ending, but that can only happen in the regular order of events. We can’t witness that sad conclusion while life is still thriving and while a twenty-year decline is yet to be understood. There, only our imagination can foresee how life may unfold. In film, our imagination is projected onto the screen. With an eerie contrast, that ultimate image of failure intrudes just when victory seems brightest; and five seconds later, the story of youth and joy resumes. Again, we see how the flow of natural events is reshaped by the mind’s power. The theater can only depict how real events might follow one another; film can bridge the gap of the future as well as the past and place twenty years ahead between this moment and the next. In short, it can function like our imagination does. It possesses the flexibility of our ideas, which are not bound by the physical necessity of external events but by the psychological rules governing idea association. In our minds, past and future become intertwined with the present. Film follows the principles of the mind rather than those of the external world.

But the play of memory and imagination can have a still richer significance in the art of the film. The screen may produce not only what we remember or imagine but what the persons in the play see in their own minds. The technique of the camera stage has successfully introduced a distinct form for this kind of picturing. If a person in the scene remembers the past, a past which may be entirely unknown to the spectator but which is living in the memory of the hero or heroine, then the former events are not thrown on the screen as an entirely new set of pictures, but they are connected with the present scene by a slow transition. He sits at the fireplace in his study and receives the letter with the news of her wedding. The close-up picture which shows us the enlargement of the engraved wedding announcement appears as an entirely new picture. The room suddenly disappears and the hand which holds the card flashes up. Again when we have read the card, it suddenly disappears and we are in the room again. But when he has dreamily stirred the fire and sits down and gazes into the flames, then the room seems to dissolve, the lines blur, the details fade away, and while the walls and the whole room slowly melt, with the same slow transition the flower garden blossoms out, the flower garden where he and she sat together under the lilac bush and he confessed to her his boyish love. And then the garden slowly vanishes and through the flowers we see once more the dim outlines of the room and they become sharper and sharper until we are in the midst of the study again and nothing is left of the vision of the past.

But the way memory and imagination play off each other can have an even deeper meaning in film art. The screen can show not only what we remember or imagine but also what the characters are picturing in their minds. The camera technique has successfully created a unique way to depict this. If a character remembers the past, a past that might be completely unfamiliar to the audience but is vivid in the hero or heroine's mind, then those past events are not simply thrown onto the screen as a set of completely new images. Instead, they are linked to the current scene through a smooth transition. He sits by the fireplace in his study and receives the letter with the news of her wedding. The close-up shot that highlights the engraved wedding announcement feels like a brand-new image. The room suddenly fades away, and the hand holding the card comes into focus. After we read the card, it vanishes, and we are back in the room again. But when he absentmindedly pokes the fire and gazes into the flames, the room seems to dissolve; the outlines blur, the details fade, and as the walls and entire room slowly disappear, the flower garden emerges, where he and she once sat together under the lilac bush, and he confessed his youthful love to her. Then the garden gradually fades away, and through the flowers, we once again see the blurry outlines of the room, which become clearer and clearer until we are back in the study, with no trace left of the vision of the past.

The technique of manufacturing such gradual transitions from one picture into another and back again demands much patience and is more difficult than the sudden change, as two exactly corresponding sets of views have to be produced and finally combined. But this cumbersome method has been fully accepted in moving picture making and the effect indeed somewhat symbolizes the appearance and disappearance of a reminiscence.

The technique of creating smooth transitions from one image to another and back again requires a lot of patience and is tougher than making sudden changes, as two perfectly matching sets of views need to be produced and combined in the end. However, this complicated method has been widely embraced in filmmaking, and the effect really captures the way memories seem to appear and fade away.

This scheme naturally opens wide perspectives. The skilful photoplaywright can communicate to us long scenes and complicated developments of the past in the form of such retrospective pictures. The man who shot his best friend has not offered an explanation in the court trial which we witness. It remains a perfect secret to the town and a mystery to the spectator; and now as the jail door closes behind him the walls of the prison fuse and melt away and we witness the scene in the little cottage where his friend secretly met his wife and how he broke in and how it all came about and how he rejected every excuse which would dishonor his home. The whole murder story becomes embedded in the reappearance of his memory ideas. The effect is much less artistic when the photoplay, as not seldom happens, uses this pattern as a mere substitute for words. In the picturization of a Gaboriau story the woman declines to tell before the court her life story which ended in a crime. She finally yields, she begins under oath to describe her whole past; and at the moment when she opens her mouth the courtroom disappears and fades into the scene in which the love adventure began. Then we pass through a long set of scenes which lead to the critical point, and at that moment we slide back into the courtroom and the woman finishes her confession. That is an external substitution of the pictures for the words, esthetically on a much lower level than the other case where the past was living only in the memory of the witness. Yet it is again an embodiment of past events which the genuine theater could offer to the ear but never to the eye.

This setup naturally opens up broad possibilities. A skilled filmmaker can convey lengthy scenes and complex developments from the past through these flashback visuals. The man who shot his best friend hasn’t given an explanation during the court trial we observe. It remains a complete secret to the town and a mystery to the audience; and now, as the jail door shuts behind him, the walls of the prison blend and dissolve, and we see the scene in the small cottage where his friend secretly met his wife, how he broke in, how it all happened, and how he dismissed every excuse that could tarnish his home. The entire murder story becomes ingrained in the resurfacing of his memories. The impact is much less artistic when the film, as often happens, treats this approach as just a substitute for dialogue. In the adaptation of a Gaboriau story, the woman refuses to share her life story in court, which ended in a crime. She eventually gives in and starts to recount her past under oath; and at the moment she opens her mouth, the courtroom disappears and transitions into the scene where her love affair began. Then we go through a long series of scenes that lead to the pivotal moment, and at that point, we slide back into the courtroom where she completes her confession. This is a superficial exchange of images for words and is artistically at a much lower level than the other case where the past lived solely in the witness's memory. Yet it is still a representation of past events that genuine theater could deliver to the ears but never to the eyes.

Just as we can follow the reminiscences of the hero, we may share the fancies of his imagination. Once more the case is distinctly different from the one in which we, the spectators, had our imaginative ideas realized on the screen. Here we are passive witnesses to the wonders which are unveiled through the imagination of the persons in the play. We see the boy who is to enter the navy and who sleeps on shipboard the first night; the walls disappear and his imagination flutters from port to port. All he has seen in the pictures of foreign lands and has heard from his comrades becomes the background of his jubilant adventures. Now he stands in the rigging while the proud vessel sails into the harbor of Rio de Janeiro and now into Manila Bay; now he enjoys himself in Japanese ports and now by the shores of India; now he glides through the Suez Canal and now he returns to the skyscrapers of New York. Not more than one minute was needed for his world travel in beautiful fantastic pictures; and yet we lived through all the boy's hopes and ecstasies with him. If we had seen the young sailor in his hammock on the theater stage, he might have hinted to us whatever passed through his mind by a kind of monologue or by some enthusiastic speech to a friend. But then we should have seen before our inner eye only that which the names of foreign places awake in ourselves. We should not really have seen the wonders of the world through the eyes of his soul and with the glow of his hope. The drama would have given dead names to our ear; the photoplay gives ravishing scenery to our eye and shows the fancy of the young fellow in the scene really living.

Just as we can follow the hero's memories, we can also experience the whims of his imagination. This situation is clearly different from when we, the audience, see our imaginative ideas brought to life on screen. Here, we are passive witnesses to the wonders revealed through the characters' imaginations. We see the boy who is about to join the navy and who sleeps on the ship for the first time; the walls fade away and his imagination flits from port to port. Everything he has seen in pictures of foreign lands and heard from his friends becomes the backdrop for his exciting adventures. Now he is up in the rigging while the proud ship sails into the harbor of Rio de Janeiro and then into Manila Bay; now he is having fun in Japanese ports and then along the shores of India; now he glides through the Suez Canal and then returns to the skyscrapers of New York. It takes no more than a minute for his world travel to unfold in beautiful, fantastic images; and yet we experience all the boy's hopes and joys alongside him. If we had seen the young sailor lying in his hammock on stage, he might have shared with us what was on his mind through a monologue or some enthusiastic chat with a friend. But then we would only see in our minds what the names of those foreign places evoke in us. We wouldn’t have truly seen the wonders of the world through the lens of his soul and the brightness of his dreams. The drama would have delivered dry names to our ears; the film gives breathtaking visuals to our eyes and portrays the young man's imagination as it truly comes to life.

From here we see the perspective to the fantastic dreams which the camera can fixate. Whenever the theater introduces an imagined setting and the stage clouds sink over the sleeper and the angels fill the stage, the beauty of the verses must excuse the shortcomings of the visual appeal. The photoplay artist can gain his triumphs here. Even the vulgar effects become softened by this setting. The ragged tramp who climbs a tree and falls asleep in the shady branches and then lives through a reversed world in which he and his kind feast and glory and live in palaces and sail in yachts, and, when the boiler of the yacht explodes, falls from the tree to the ground, becomes a tolerable spectacle because all is merged in the unreal pictures. Or, to think of the other extreme, gigantic visions of mankind crushed by the Juggernaut of war and then blessed by the angel of peace may arise before our eyes with all their spiritual meaning.

From here, we see the potential for the amazing dreams that the camera can capture. Whenever the theater presents an imagined setting and the stage becomes shrouded in clouds, filling it with angels, the beauty of the verses must make up for any lack of visual appeal. This is where the film artist can truly shine. Even the cruder effects are softened by this ambiance. The disheveled drifter who climbs a tree, falls asleep in its shade, and then experiences a reversed world where he and his kind feast, thrive, live in palaces, and sail on yachts—only to fall from the tree to the ground when the yacht’s boiler explodes—becomes an acceptable spectacle because everything blends into the unreal images. Or, on the other hand, we can envision monumental scenes of humanity crushed by the relentless force of war, only to be later graced by the angel of peace, all unfolding before our eyes with deep spiritual significance.

Even the whole play may find its frame in a setting which offers a five-reel performance as one great imaginative dream. In the pretty play, "When Broadway was a Trail," the hero and heroine stand on the Metropolitan Tower and bend over its railing. They see the turmoil of New York of the present day and ships passing the Statue of Liberty. He begins to tell her of the past when in the seventeenth century Broadway was a trail; and suddenly the time which his imagination awakens is with us. Through two hours we follow the happenings of three hundred years ago. From New Amsterdam it leads to the New England shores, all the early colonial life shows us its intimate charm, and when the hero has found his way back over the Broadway trail, we awake and see the last gestures with which the young narrator shows to the girl the Broadway buildings of today.

Even the entire play can be framed as a five-reel performance, like one big imaginative dream. In the charming play, "When Broadway was a Trail," the hero and heroine are on the Metropolitan Tower, leaning over the railing. They see the chaos of modern New York and the ships passing by the Statue of Liberty. He starts telling her about the past when, in the seventeenth century, Broadway was just a trail; and suddenly, the time that his imagination brings to life is right with us. For two hours, we follow the events from three hundred years ago. It begins in New Amsterdam and moves to the New England coast, showcasing the intimate charm of early colonial life. When the hero finds his way back over the Broadway trail, we wake up to the final gestures of the young narrator as he shows the girl the Broadway buildings of today.

Memory looks toward the past, expectation and imagination toward the future. But in the midst of the perception of our surroundings our mind turns not only to that which has happened before and which may happen later; it is interested in happenings at the same time in other places. The theater can show us only the events at one spot. Our mind craves more. Life does not move forward on one single pathway. The whole manifoldness of parallel currents with their endless interconnections is the true substance of our understanding. It may be the task of a particular art to force all into one steady development between the walls of one room, but every letter and every telephone call to the room remind us even then that other developments with other settings are proceeding in the same instant. The soul longs for this whole interplay, and the richer it is in contrasts, the more satisfaction may be drawn from our simultaneous presence in many quarters. The photoplay alone gives us our chance for such omnipresence. We see the banker, who had told his young wife that he has a directors' meeting, at a late hour in a cabaret feasting with a stenographer from his office. She had promised her poor old parents to be home early. We see the gorgeous roof garden and the tango dances, but our dramatic interest is divided among the frivolous pair, the jealous young woman in the suburban cottage, and the anxious old people in the attic. Our mind wavers among the three scenes. The photoplay shows one after another. Yet it can hardly be said that we think of them as successive. It is as if we were really at all three places at once. We see the joyous dance which is of central dramatic interest for twenty seconds, then for three seconds the wife in her luxurious boudoir looking at the dial of the clock, for three seconds again the grieved parents eagerly listening for any sound on the stairs, and anew for twenty seconds the turbulent festival. The frenzy reaches a climax, and in that moment we are suddenly again with his unhappy wife; it is only a flash, and the next instant we see the tears of the girl's poor mother. The three scenes proceed almost as if no one were interrupted at all. It is as if we saw one through another, as if three tones blended into one chord.

Memory looks to the past, while expectation and imagination look toward the future. But as we take in our surroundings, our minds not only reflect on what has happened before and what might happen later; they are also curious about events happening simultaneously in other places. The theater can show us what’s occurring in one location. Our minds crave more. Life doesn’t move along a single path. The complex web of parallel events and their endless connections is the true essence of our understanding. A specific art form might aim to unify everything into one continuous story within the confines of a single room, but every letter and phone call to that room reminds us that other stories in different settings are unfolding at the same moment. Our souls yearn for this complete interplay, and the more contrasting it is, the more satisfaction we gain from being present in many places at once. The film uniquely offers us this sense of omnipresence. We see the banker, who told his young wife he had a directors’ meeting, late at a cabaret reveling with a secretary from his office. She promised her elderly parents she’d be home early. We witness the lavish rooftop garden and the tango dancing, but our dramatic interest is split between the carefree couple, the jealous young wife in her suburban home, and the worried old parents in the attic. Our thoughts drift among these three scenes. The film displays them one after the other. Yet we don’t really consider them sequentially. It feels like we are actually at all three places at once. We watch the joyful dance, which is the main dramatic focus, for twenty seconds, then for three seconds we see the wife in her fancy room glancing at the clock, then for another three seconds, the distressed parents listening intently for any sound from the stairs, and then back to the lively celebration for another twenty seconds. The chaos reaches its peak, and all of a sudden, we find ourselves back with his forlorn wife; it’s just a brief moment, and next, we see the tears of the girl’s troubled mother. The three scenes unfold almost as if no one is interrupted at all. It’s as if we are seeing one through another, as if three notes blend into one chord.

There is no limit to the number of threads which may be interwoven. A complex intrigue may demand coöperation at half a dozen spots, and we look now into one, now into another, and never have the impression that they come one after another. The temporal element has disappeared, the one action irradiates in all directions. Of course, this can easily be exaggerated, and the result must be a certain restlessness. If the scene changes too often and no movement is carried on without a break, the play may irritate us by its nervous jerking from place to place. Near the end of the Theda Bara edition of Carmen the scene changes one hundred and seventy times in ten minutes, an average of a little more than three seconds for each scene. We follow Don Jose and Carmen and the toreador in ever new phases of the dramatic action and are constantly carried back to Don Jose's home village where his mother waits for him. There indeed the dramatic tension has an element of nervousness, in contrast to the Geraldine Farrar version of Carmen which allows a more unbroken development of the single action.

There’s no limit to the number of threads that can be woven together. A complex plot might require coordination at several points, and we shift our focus from one to another, never feeling like they happen in a strict order. The sense of time fades away, and the actions radiate in all directions. Of course, this can easily be taken too far, resulting in a sense of restlessness. If the scene changes too frequently and there's no uninterrupted movement, the play can become frustrating with its rapid shifts from place to place. Near the end of Theda Bara’s version of Carmen, the scene changes one hundred and seventy times in just ten minutes, averaging a little over three seconds per scene. We follow Don Jose, Carmen, and the toreador through various phases of the dramatic action, consistently being taken back to Don Jose's hometown where his mother awaits him. Here, the dramatic tension feels a bit jittery, in contrast to Geraldine Farrar’s version of Carmen, which allows for a smoother flow of the main action.

But whether it is used with artistic reserve or with a certain dangerous exaggeration, in any case its psychological meaning is obvious. It demonstrates to us in a new form the same principle which the perception of depth and of movement, the acts of attention and of memory and of imagination have shown. The objective world is molded by the interests of the mind. Events which are far distant from one another so that we could not be physically present at all of them at the same time are fusing in our field of vision, just as they are brought together in our own consciousness. Psychologists are still debating whether the mind can ever devote itself to several groups of ideas at the same time. Some claim that any so-called division of attention is really a rapid alteration. Yet in any case subjectively we experience it as an actual division. Our mind is split and can be here and there apparently in one mental act. This inner division, this awareness of contrasting situations, this interchange of diverging experiences in the soul, can never be embodied except in the photoplay.

But whether it's used with artistic restraint or with a certain risky exaggeration, its psychological meaning is clear. It shows us in a new way the same principle that the perception of depth and movement, as well as the acts of attention, memory, and imagination, has revealed. The objective world is shaped by the interests of the mind. Events that are far apart in time and space, such that we couldn't physically be present at all of them simultaneously, merge in our field of vision, just like they come together in our own consciousness. Psychologists are still debating whether the mind can focus on multiple groups of ideas at the same time. Some argue that so-called divided attention is actually just a quick switch. Yet, subjectively, we experience it as a real division. Our mind feels split and can be here and there in what seems like a single mental act. This inner division, this awareness of contrasting situations, this exchange of diverging experiences in the soul, can only be expressed through the photoplay.

An interesting side light falls on this relation between the mind and the pictured scenes, if we turn to a mental process which is quite nearly related to those which we have considered, namely, suggestion. It is similar in that a suggested idea which awakes in our consciousness is built up from the same material as the memory ideas or the imaginative ideas. The play of associations controls the suggestions, as it does the reminiscences and fancies. Yet in an essential point it is quite different. All the other associative ideas find merely their starting point in those outer impressions. We see a landscape on the stage or on the screen or in life and this visual perception is the cue which stirs up in our memory or imagination any fitting ideas. The choice of them, however, is completely controlled by our own interest and attitude and by our previous experiences. Those memories and fancies are therefore felt as our subjective supplements. We do not believe in their objective reality. A suggestion, on the other hand, is forced on us. The outer perception is not only a starting point but a controlling influence. The associated idea is not felt as our creation but as something to which we have to submit. The extreme case is, of course, that of the hypnotizer whose word awakens in the mind of the hypnotized person ideas which he cannot resist. He must accept them as real, he must believe that the dreary room is a beautiful garden in which he picks flowers.

An interesting aspect of the relationship between the mind and the images we see becomes clear when we look at a mental process closely related to those we've discussed, which is suggestion. It’s similar in that a suggested idea that enters our consciousness is built up from the same material as memories or imaginative ideas. The flow of associations drives the suggestions, just like it does with memories and fantasies. However, it differs in a crucial way. Other associative ideas only find their starting point in those external impressions. We see a landscape on stage or on screen or in real life, and this visual input triggers relevant ideas in our memory or imagination. The selection of these ideas is completely guided by our own interests, attitudes, and past experiences. Thus, those memories and fantasies feel like our personal additions. We don’t believe in their objective reality. A suggestion, however, is imposed on us. The external perception serves not only as a starting point but as a controlling force. The associated idea doesn’t feel like our creation but rather as something we have to accept. The extreme case is, of course, that of the hypnotist, whose words evoke ideas in the mind of the hypnotized person that he cannot resist. He must accept them as real; he must believe that the dreary room is a beautiful garden where he is picking flowers.

The spellbound audience in a theater or in a picture house is certainly in a state of heightened suggestibility and is ready to receive suggestions. One great and fundamental suggestion is working in both cases, inasmuch as the drama as well as the photoplay suggests to the mind of the spectator that this is more than mere play, that it is life which we witness. But if we go further and ask for the application of suggestions in the detailed action, we cannot overlook the fact that the theater is extremely limited in its means. A series of events on the stage may strongly force on the mind the prediction of something which must follow, but inasmuch as the stage has to do with real physical beings who must behave according to the laws of nature, it cannot avoid offering us the actual events for which we were waiting. To be sure, even on the stage the hero may talk, the revolver in his hand, until it is fully suggested to us that the suicidal shot will end his life in the next instant; and yet just then the curtain may fall, and only the suggestion of his death may work in our mind. But this is evidently a very exceptional case as a fall of the curtain means the ending of the scene. In the act itself every series of events must come to its natural ending. If two men begin to fight on the stage, nothing remains to be suggested; we must simply witness the fight. And if two lovers embrace each other, we have to see their caresses.

The captivated audience in a theater or cinema is definitely in a state of heightened suggestibility and ready to accept suggestions. One major and fundamental suggestion is active in both cases, as the drama and the film simultaneously convey to the viewer that this is more than just entertainment; we are witnessing life. However, if we delve deeper and explore the application of suggestions in the detailed actions, we cannot ignore the fact that the theater is quite limited in its methods. A series of events on stage might strongly lead the mind to expect something to happen next, but since the stage involves real physical beings who must act according to the laws of nature, it cannot help but present us with the actual events we are anticipating. Certainly, even on stage, the hero can talk while holding a gun, suggesting that the impending suicidal shot will end his life in the next moment; yet, just then, the curtain may drop, and only the suggestion of his death may linger in our minds. But this is clearly a rare case, as a curtain fall signifies the end of the scene. In the act itself, every series of events must reach its natural conclusion. If two men start fighting on stage, there’s nothing left to suggest; we simply have to watch the fight. And if two lovers embrace, we have to witness their affection.

The photoplay can not only "cut back" in the service of memories, but it can cut off in the service of suggestion. Even if the police did not demand that actual crimes and suicides should never be shown on the screen, for mere artistic reasons it would be wiser to leave the climax to the suggestion to which the whole scene has led. There is no need of bringing the series of pictures to its logical end, because they are pictures only and not the real objects. At any instant the man may disappear from the scene, and no automobile can race over the ground so rapidly that it cannot be stopped just as it is to crash into the rushing express train. The horseback rider jumps into the abyss; we see him fall, and yet at the moment when he crashes to the ground we are already in the midst of a far distant scene. Again and again with doubtful taste the sensuality of the nickel audiences has been stirred up by suggestive pictures of a girl undressing, and when in the intimate chamber the last garment was touched, the spectators were suddenly in the marketplace among crowds of people or in a sailing vessel on the river. The whole technique of the rapid changes of scenes which we have recognized as so characteristic of the photoplay involves at every end point elements of suggestion which to a certain degree link the separate scenes as the afterimages link the separate pictures.

The film can not only "flash back" in service of memories, but it can also imply things. Even if the police didn’t insist that actual crimes and suicides should never be shown on screen, for purely artistic reasons it would be smarter to leave the climax to the suggestion that the whole scene has built up to. There’s no need to bring the series of images to a logical conclusion because they are just images and not real objects. At any moment, the man may vanish from the scene, and no car can speed over the ground so fast that it couldn’t be stopped just in time to crash into the oncoming express train. The horseback rider leaps into the void; we see him fall, and yet the moment he hits the ground, we’re already in the midst of a completely different scene. Time and again, the questionable tastes of audiences have been provoked by suggestive images of a girl undressing, and when in the private space the last piece of clothing was touched, the viewers suddenly found themselves in a marketplace among crowds of people or on a sailboat in the river. The whole technique of rapid scene changes that we’ve come to recognize as so characteristic of film involves moments of suggestion at every transition point that link the separate scenes in a way similar to how afterimages connect separate pictures.


CHAPTER VI

EMOTIONS

To picture emotions must be the central aim of the photoplay. In the drama words of wisdom may be spoken and we may listen to the conversations with interest even if they have only intellectual and not emotional character. But the actor whom we see on the screen can hold our attention only by what he is doing and his actions gain meaning and unity for us through the feelings and emotions which control them. More than in the drama the persons in the photoplay are to us first of all subjects of emotional experiences. Their joy and pain, their hope and fear, their love and hate, their gratitude and envy, their sympathy and malice, give meaning and value to the play. What are the chances of the photoartist to bring these feelings to a convincing expression?

To visualize emotions should be the main goal of film. In a play, wise words may be spoken, and we can listen to conversations with interest, even if they are purely intellectual and lack emotional weight. But the actor we see on screen can only hold our attention through their actions, which gain meaning and cohesion through the feelings and emotions that drive them. More than in theater, the characters in a film are primarily expressions of emotional experiences. Their joy and pain, hope and fear, love and hate, gratitude and envy, sympathy and malice, all give meaning and value to the story. What are the chances for filmmakers to convincingly convey these feelings?

No doubt, an emotion which is deprived of its discharge by words has lost a strong element, and yet gestures, actions, and facial play are so interwoven with the psychical process of an intense emotion that every shade can find its characteristic delivery. The face alone with its tensions around the mouth, with its play of the eye, with its cast of the forehead, and even with the motions of the nostrils and the setting of the jaw, may bring numberless shades into the feeling tone. Here again the close-up can strongly heighten the impression. It is at the climax of emotion on the stage that the theatergoer likes to use his opera glass in order not to overlook the subtle excitement of the lips and the passion of the eyeballs and the ghastly pupil and the quivering cheeks. The enlargement by the close-up on the screen brings this emotional action of the face to sharpest relief. Or it may show us enlarged a play of the hands in which anger and rage or tender love or jealousy speak in unmistakable language. In humorous scenes even the flirting of amorous feet may in the close-up tell the story of their possessors' hearts. Nevertheless there are narrow limits. Many emotional symptoms like blushing or growing pale would be lost in the mere photographic rendering, and, above all, these and many other signs of feeling are not under voluntary control. The photoactors may carefully go through the movements and imitate the contractions and relaxations of the muscles, and yet may be unable to produce those processes which are most essential for the true life emotion, namely those in the glands, blood vessels, and involuntary muscles.

No doubt, an emotion that can't be expressed through words has lost a significant element, and yet gestures, actions, and facial expressions are so intertwined with the mental process of intense feelings that every nuance can find its unique expression. The face alone, with its tensions around the mouth, its eye movements, its forehead expressions, and even the movements of the nostrils and the position of the jaw, can convey countless shades of emotion. Here again, close-ups can greatly enhance the impact. It is at the peak of emotion on stage that theatergoers like to use their opera glasses to not miss the subtle excitement of the lips, the passion in the eyes, the dilated pupils, and the trembling cheeks. The close-up on the screen highlights this emotional activity of the face sharply. It can also magnify a play of the hands where anger, rage, tender love, or jealousy communicate in unmistakable ways. In humorous scenes, even the flirting of romantic feet can, in close-up, reveal the state of their owners' hearts. However, there are limitations. Many emotional indicators, like blushing or turning pale, would be lost in a simple photographic representation, and, above all, these and many other signs of feeling are not under voluntary control. Actors may meticulously go through the motions and mimic the contractions and relaxations of muscles, yet they may struggle to produce those processes essential for true emotional life—specifically those occurring in the glands, blood vessels, and involuntary muscles.

Certainly the going through the motions will shade consciousness sufficiently so that some of these involuntary and instinctive responses may set in. The actor really experiences something of the inner excitement which he imitates and with the excitement the automatic reactions appear. Yet only a few can actually shed tears, however much they move the muscles of the face into the semblance of crying. The pupil of the eye is somewhat more obedient, as the involuntary muscles of the iris respond to the cue which a strong imagination can give, and the mimic presentation of terror or astonishment or hatred may actually lead to the enlargement or contraction of the pupil, which the close-up may show. Yet there remains too much which mere art cannot render and which life alone produces, because the consciousness of the unreality of the situation works as a psychological inhibition on the automatic instinctive responses. The actor may artificially tremble, or breathe heavily, but the strong pulsation of the carotid artery or the moistness of the skin from perspiration will not come with an imitated emotion. Of course, that is true of the actor on the stage, too. But the content of the words and the modulation of the voice can help so much that the shortcomings of the visual impression are forgotten.

Certainly, going through the motions will dull awareness enough for some of these involuntary and instinctive reactions to kick in. The actor genuinely feels a bit of the inner excitement they’re mimicking, and with that excitement, the automatic responses emerge. However, only a few can actually cry, no matter how much they move their facial muscles to mimic tears. The pupil of the eye is a bit more responsive, as the involuntary muscles of the iris react to cues that a strong imagination can provide, and the mimicking of fear or shock or anger can actually cause the pupil to enlarge or contract, which the close-up can reveal. Still, there’s too much that mere acting can’t convey and that only real life can produce, because the awareness of the situation's unreality acts as a psychological barrier to instinctive responses. The actor might fake trembling or breathe heavily, but the strong beating of the carotid artery or the sweating of the skin won’t happen with a feigned emotion. Of course, that applies to actors on stage as well. But the meaning of the words and the tone of the voice can help so much that the flaws in the visual impression are overlooked.

To the actor of the moving pictures, on the other hand, the temptation offers itself to overcome the deficiency by a heightening of the gestures and of the facial play, with the result that the emotional expression becomes exaggerated. No friend of the photoplay can deny that much of the photoart suffers from this almost unavoidable tendency. The quick marchlike rhythm of the drama of the reel favors this artificial overdoing, too. The rapid alternation of the scenes often seems to demand a jumping from one emotional climax to another, or rather the appearance of such extreme expressions where the content of the play hardly suggests such heights and depths of emotion. The soft lights are lost and the mental eye becomes adjusted to glaring flashes. This undeniable defect is felt with the American actors still more than with the European, especially with the French and Italian ones with whom excited gestures and highly accentuated expressions of the face are natural. A New England temperament forced into Neapolitan expressions of hatred or jealousy or adoration too easily appears a caricature. It is not by chance that so many strong actors of the stage are such more or less decided failures on the screen. They have been dragged into an art which is foreign to them, and their achievement has not seldom remained far below that of the specializing photoactor. The habitual reliance on the magic of the voice deprives them of the natural means of expression when they are to render emotions without words. They give too little or too much; they are not expressive, or they become grotesque.

To actors in movies, there's a temptation to make up for the lack of depth by exaggerating gestures and facial expressions, which often leads to overly dramatic emotional displays. Anyone who appreciates films can't deny that a lot of this art suffers from this nearly unavoidable habit. The quick, almost marching rhythm of film drama encourages this kind of over-exaggeration as well. The fast scene changes often seem to require jumping from one emotional peak to another, creating an impression of extreme feelings even when the story doesn't really call for them. Soft lighting gets lost, and the viewer’s eye adjusts to harsh flashes. This clear flaw is even more noticeable with American actors compared to their European counterparts, especially the French and Italian, who naturally use animated gestures and bold facial expressions. A New England temperament forced into showing extreme Neapolitan emotions like hatred, jealousy, or adoration often comes off as a caricature. It's no coincidence that so many strong stage actors struggle on-screen. They’ve been pulled into an art form that's not their own, and their performance frequently falls short compared to that of specialized film actors. Their usual reliance on vocal magic takes away their natural expressiveness when they need to convey emotions without words. They either don't give enough or go too far; they either lack expressiveness or become comical.

Of course, the photoartist profits from one advantage. He is not obliged to find the most expressive gesture in one decisive moment of the stage performance. He can not only rehearse, but he can repeat the scene before the camera until exactly the right inspiration comes, and the manager who takes the close-up visage may discard many a poor pose before he strikes that one expression in which the whole content of the feeling of the scene is concentrated. In one other respect the producer of the photoplay has a technical advantage. More easily than the stage manager of the real theater he can choose actors whose natural build and physiognomy fit the rôle and predispose them for the desired expression. The drama depends upon professional actors; the photoplay can pick players among any group of people for specific rôles. They need no art of speaking and no training in delivery. The artificial make-up of the stage actors in order to give them special character is therefore less needed for the screen. The expression of the faces and the gestures must gain through such natural fitness of the man for the particular rôle. If the photoplay needs a brutal boxer in a mining camp, the producer will not, like the stage manager, try to transform a clean, neat, professional actor into a vulgar brute, but he will sift the Bowery until he has found some creature who looks as if he came from that mining camp and who has at least the prizefighter's cauliflower ear which results from the smashing of the ear cartilage. If he needs the fat bartender with his smug smile, or the humble Jewish peddler, or the Italian organ grinder, he does not rely on wigs and paint; he finds them all ready-made on the East Side. With the right body and countenance the emotion is distinctly more credible. The emotional expression in the photoplays is therefore often more natural in the small rôles which the outsiders play than in the chief parts of the professionals who feel that they must outdo nature.

Of course, the photo artist has one advantage. He's not required to capture the most expressive gesture in a single moment of the stage performance. He can not only rehearse, but he can also repeat the scene in front of the camera until the right inspiration strikes. The director who takes the close-up can discard many poor poses before getting that one expression where the entire feeling of the scene is captured. In another way, the producer of the film has a technical edge. More easily than a theater director, he can choose actors whose natural appearance fits the role and predisposes them to convey the desired emotion. The drama relies on professional actors, while films can select performers from any group for specific roles. They don't need to be skilled speakers or trained in delivery. The elaborate makeup that stage actors use to portray special characters is less necessary for the screen. The expressions on faces and gestures should come from the natural suitability of the person for that specific role. If the film needs a brutal boxer in a mining camp, the producer won’t try to transform a clean, polished professional actor into a rough brute, but will search the Bowery until he finds someone who looks like they belong to that mining camp and who has at least the cauliflower ear characteristic of a prizefighter. If he needs a fat bartender with a smug smile, or a humble Jewish vendor, or an Italian organ grinder, he doesn’t rely on wigs and makeup; he finds them all already on the East Side. With the right body and face, the emotion feels much more believable. Therefore, the emotional expression in films is often more natural in the small roles played by non-professionals than in the main roles where professionals feel they must outdo reality.

But our whole consideration so far has been onesided and narrow. We have asked only about the means by which the photoactor expresses his emotion, and we were naturally confined to the analysis of his bodily reactions. But while the human individual in our surroundings has hardly any other means than the bodily expressions to show his emotions and moods, the photoplaywright is certainly not bound by these limits. Yet even in life the emotional tone may radiate beyond the body. A person expresses his mourning by his black clothes and his joy by gay attire, or he may make the piano or violin ring forth in happiness or moan in sadness. Even his whole room or house may be penetrated by his spirit of welcoming cordiality or his emotional setting of forbidding harshness. The feeling of the soul emanates into the surroundings and the impression which we get of our neighbor's emotional attitude may be derived from this external frame of the personality as much as from the gestures and the face.

But so far, our discussion has been one-sided and narrow. We've only looked at how the photoactor shows his emotions, and we've mainly focused on analyzing his physical reactions. While people around us usually express their emotions and moods through physical expressions, the photoplaywright isn't limited by that. In real life, emotional tone can extend beyond the body. A person might show their grief with dark clothing and their happiness with bright outfits, or they might let the piano or violin resonate with joy or lament in sorrow. Even their entire room or house can reflect their welcoming warmth or the harshness of their emotional state. The feelings of the soul extend into the environment, and the impression we get of our neighbor's emotional attitude can come as much from this external framework of their personality as from their gestures and facial expressions.

This effect of the surrounding surely can and must be much heightened in the artistic theater play. All the stage settings of the scene ought to be in harmony with the fundamental emotions of the play, and many an act owes its success to the unity of emotional impression which results from the perfect painting of the background; it reverberates to the passions of the mind. From the highest artistic color and form effects of the stage in the Reinhardt style down to the cheapest melodrama with soft blue lights and tender music for the closing scene, the stage arrangements tell the story of the intimate emotion. But just this additional expression of the feeling through the medium of the surrounding scene, through background and setting, through lines and forms and movements, is very much more at the disposal of the photoartist. He alone can change the background and all the surroundings of the acting person from instant to instant. He is not bound to one setting, he has no technical difficulty in altering the whole scene with every smile and every frown. To be sure, the theater can give us changing sunshine and thunderclouds too. But it must go on at the slow pace and with the clumsiness with which the events in nature pass. The photoplay can flit from one to the other. Not more than one sixteenth of a second is needed to carry us from one corner of the globe to the other, from a jubilant setting to a mourning scene. The whole keyboard of the imagination may be used to serve this emotionalizing of nature.

This effect of the surroundings can and must be amplified in the art of theater. All the stage elements should align with the key emotions of the play, and many performances owe their success to the unified emotional impact created by a well-crafted background; it resonates with the audience's feelings. From the highest artistic visuals in the Reinhardt style to the simplest melodrama featuring soft blue lighting and gentle music for the final scene, stage arrangements convey the story of deep emotion. However, this added expression of feeling through the surrounding scene, including the background and setting, along with lines, shapes, and movements, is much more accessible to the photographer. Only they can instantly alter the background and everything around the actor. They're not limited to a single setting and can change the entire scene with every smile and frown. Of course, the theater can present changing sunlight and storm clouds too, but it moves at the slow pace and with the awkwardness of natural events. The film can switch from one to the other in an instant. It takes less than one sixteenth of a second to transport us from one corner of the globe to another, from a joyful setting to a sorrowful scene. The full range of imagination can be utilized to enhance this emotional depiction of nature.

There is a girl in her little room, and she opens a letter and reads it. There is no need of showing us in a close-up the letter page with the male handwriting and the words of love and the request for her hand. We see it in her radiant visage, we read it from her fascinated arms and hands; and yet how much more can the photoartist tell us about the storm of emotions in her soul. The walls of her little room fade away. Beautiful hedges of hawthorn blossom around her, rose bushes in wonderful glory arise and the whole ground is alive with exotic flowers. Or the young artist sits in his attic playing his violin; we see the bow moving over the strings but the dreamy face of the player does not change with his music. Under the spell of his tones his features are immovable as if they were staring at a vision. They do not speak of the changing emotions which his melodies awake. We cannot hear those tones. And yet we do hear them: a lovely spring landscape widens behind his head, we see the valleys of May and the bubbling brooks and the young wild beeches. And slowly it changes into the sadness of the autumn, the sere leaves are falling around the player, heavy clouds hang low over his head. Suddenly at a sharp accent of his bow the storm breaks, we are carried to the wildness of rugged rocks or to the raging sea; and again comes tranquillity over the world, the little country village of his youth fills the background, the harvest is brought from the fields, the sun sets upon a scene of happiness, and while the bow slowly sinks, the walls and ceiling of his attic close in again. No shade, no tint, no hue of his emotions has escaped us; we followed them as if we had heard the rejoicing and the sadness, the storm and the peace of his melodious tones. Such imaginative settings can be only the extreme; they would not be fit for the routine play. But, however much weaker and fainter the echo of the surroundings may be in the realistic pictures of the standard photoplay, the chances are abundant everywhere and no skillful playwright will ever disregard them entirely. Not the portrait of the man but the picture as a whole has to be filled with emotional exuberance.

There’s a girl in her small room, and she opens a letter and reads it. There’s no need for a close-up of the letter with the masculine handwriting and words of love asking for her hand. We see it in her glowing face, we can tell from her captivated arms and hands; and yet, how much more could the photographer convey about the whirlwind of emotions inside her. The walls of her little room fade away. Beautiful hawthorn blossoms surround her, rose bushes flourish in stunning glory, and the entire ground is vibrant with exotic flowers. Or the young artist sits in his attic playing his violin; we see the bow moving across the strings, but the dreamy expression on the player's face remains unchanged by his music. Caught up in his melodies, his features are still as if they’re gazing at a vision. They don’t reveal the shifting emotions his tunes evoke. We can’t hear those notes. And yet we do hear them: a lovely spring landscape expands behind him, we see the valleys in May and the flowing brooks and the young wild beech trees. Gradually it transforms into the sadness of autumn, dry leaves falling around the player, heavy clouds hanging low above him. Suddenly, with a sharp stroke of his bow, the storm breaks, and we’re taken to the wildness of rugged rocks or the raging sea; then peace descends once more, the quaint village of his youth appears in the background, the harvest is gathered from the fields, the sun sets on a scene of happiness, and as the bow slowly drops, the walls and ceiling of his attic close in again. No shade, no tint, no hue of his emotions has escaped us; we’ve followed them as if we had really heard the joy and sadness, the storm and serenity of his melodic tones. Such imaginative settings can only be extreme; they wouldn't suit a routine play. But, no matter how weaker and fainter the echoes of the surroundings may be in the realistic images of a standard film, the opportunities are plentiful everywhere, and no skilled playwright will ever entirely ignore them. It’s not just the portrait of the man, but the picture as a whole that needs to be filled with emotional vitality.

Everything so far has referred to the emotions of the persons in the play, but this cannot be sufficient. When we were interested in attention and memory we did not ask about the act of attention and memory in the persons of the play, but in the spectator, and we recognized that these mental activities and excitements in the audience were projected into the moving pictures. Just here was the center of our interest, because it showed that uniqueness of the means with which the photoplaywright can work. If we want to shape the question now in the same way, we ought to ask how it is with the emotions of the spectator. But then two different groups of cases must be distinguished. On the one side we have those emotions in which the feelings of the persons in the play are transmitted to our own soul. On the other side, we find those feelings with which we respond to the scenes in the play, feelings which may be entirely different, perhaps exactly opposite to those which the figures in the play express.

Everything up to now has focused on the emotions of the characters in the play, but that’s not enough. When we looked at attention and memory, we weren’t asking about these actions in the characters, but in the audience, and we acknowledged that these mental activities and feelings in the audience were projected onto the moving pictures. This was the core of our interest because it highlighted the unique tools the photoplaywright has at their disposal. If we want to frame the question similarly now, we need to ask about the emotions of the audience. However, we must distinguish between two different groups of cases. On one side, we have the emotions where the feelings of the characters are conveyed to us. On the other side, we encounter feelings that we experience in response to the scenes, which may be completely different or even the opposite of what the characters express.

The first group is by far the larger one. Our imitation of the emotions which we see expressed brings vividness and affective tone into our grasping of the play's action. We sympathize with the sufferer and that means that the pain which he expresses becomes our own pain. We share the joy of the happy lover and the grief of the despondent mourner, we feel the indignation of the betrayed wife and the fear of the man in danger. The visual perception of the various forms of expression of these emotions fuses in our mind with the conscious awareness of the emotion expressed; we feel as if we were directly seeing and observing the emotion itself. Moreover the idea awakens in us the appropriate reactions. The horror which we see makes us really shrink, the happiness which we witness makes us relax, the pain which we observe brings contractions in our muscles; and all the resulting sensations from muscles, joints, tendons, from skin and viscera, from blood circulation and breathing, give the color of living experience to the emotional reflection in our mind. It is obvious that for this leading group of emotions the relation of the pictures to the feelings of the persons in the play and to the feelings of the spectator is exactly the same. If we start from the emotions of the audience, we can say that the pain and the joy which the spectator feels are really projected to the screen, projected both into the portraits of the persons and into the pictures of the scenery and background into which the personal emotions radiate. The fundamental principle which we recognized for all the other mental states is accordingly no less efficient in the case of the spectator's emotions.

The first group is by far the larger one. Our mimicry of the emotions we see portrayed brings clarity and emotional depth to our understanding of the play's action. We empathize with those who are suffering, which means that their pain becomes our pain. We share in the joy of the happy lover and the sorrow of the grieving mourner; we feel the anger of the betrayed wife and the fear of the man in peril. The visual perception of these various expressions of emotion combines in our minds with the conscious awareness of what is being felt; it’s as if we are directly witnessing the emotion itself. Furthermore, the idea triggers in us the right responses. The horror we observe makes us shrink back, the happiness we see allows us to relax, and the pain we witness causes our muscles to tense. All the sensations arising from our muscles, joints, tendons, skin, and internal organs, along with our blood circulation and breathing, add a sense of real experience to the emotional reflection in our minds. It’s clear that for this primary group of emotions, the connection between the characters' feelings in the play and those of the audience is exactly the same. If we start from the emotions of the audience, we can say that the pain and joy felt by the spectator are truly projected onto the stage, both into the characters' expressions and the scenery and backgrounds that reflect these personal emotions. The fundamental principle we've recognized for all other mental states also applies powerfully to the spectator's emotions.

The analysis of the mind of the audience must lead, however, to that second group of emotions, those in which the spectator responds to the scenes on the film from the standpoint of his independent affective life. We see an overbearing pompous person who is filled with the emotion of solemnity, and yet he awakens in us the emotion of humor. We answer by our ridicule. We see the scoundrel who in the melodramatic photoplay is filled with fiendish malice, and yet we do not respond by imitating his emotion; we feel moral indignation toward his personality. We see the laughing, rejoicing child who, while he picks the berries from the edge of the precipice, is not aware that he must fall down if the hero does not snatch him back at the last moment. Of course, we feel the child's joy with him. Otherwise we should not even understand his behaviour, but we feel more strongly the fear and the horror of which the child himself does not know anything. The photoplaywrights have so far hardly ventured to project this second class of emotion, which the spectator superadds to the events, into the show on the screen. Only tentative suggestions can be found. The enthusiasm or the disapproval or indignation of the spectator is sometimes released in the lights and shades and in the setting of the landscape. There are still rich possibilities along this line. The photoplay has hardly come to its own with regard to these secondary emotions. Here it has not emancipated itself sufficiently from the model of the stage. Those emotions arise, of course, in the audience of a theater too, but the dramatic stage cannot embody them. In the opera the orchestra may symbolize them. For the photoplay, which is not bound to the physical succession of events but gives us only the pictorial reflection, there is an unlimited field for the expression of these attitudes in ourselves.

The analysis of the audience's mind must lead, however, to that second group of emotions, where the viewer reacts to the scenes in the film based on their own feelings. We see an arrogant, pompous person who seems serious, yet he makes us laugh. We respond with ridicule. We notice the villain in the melodramatic film, filled with evil intent, and instead of mirroring his emotions, we feel moral outrage toward him. We see the laughing, joyful child who, while picking berries at the edge of a cliff, is unaware that he could fall if the hero doesn't pull him back at the last moment. Of course, we share in the child's joy; otherwise, we wouldn’t understand his actions. But we feel even more intensely the fear and horror that the child is oblivious to. So far, filmmakers have hardly attempted to express this second type of emotion, which the viewer adds to the events, on screen. Only tentative hints can be found. The audience's enthusiasm or disapproval sometimes manifests in the lighting and the landscape's setting. There are still many opportunities here. The film has barely explored these secondary emotions. It hasn't fully broken away from traditional stage models. Those feelings also arise in theater audiences, but the dramatic stage can't convey them. In opera, the orchestra might embody them. For film, which isn't limited to the physical sequence of events and provides us with only a visual representation, there is an endless opportunity to express these feelings within ourselves.

But the wide expansion of this field and of the whole manifoldness of emotional possibilities in the moving pictures is not sufficiently characterized as long as we think only of the optical representation in the actual outer world. The camera men of the moving pictures have photographed the happenings of the world and all its wonders, have gone to the bottom of the sea and up to the clouds; they have surprised the beasts in the jungles and in the Arctic ice; they have dwelt with the lowest races and have captured the greatest men of our time: and they are always haunted by the fear that the supply of new sensations may be exhausted. Curiously enough, they have so far ignored the fact that an inexhaustible wealth of new impressions is at their disposal, which has hardly been touched as yet. There is a material and a formal side to the pictures which we see in their rapid succession. The material side is controlled by the content of what is shown to us. But the formal side depends upon the outer conditions under which this content is exhibited. Even with ordinary photographs we are accustomed to discriminate between those in which every detail is very sharp and others, often much more artistic, in which everything looks somewhat misty and blurring and in which sharp outlines are avoided. We have this formal aspect, of course, still more prominently if we see the same landscape or the same person painted by a dozen different artists. Each one has his own style. Or, to point to another elementary factor, the same series of moving pictures may be given to us with a very slow or with a rapid turning of the crank. It is the same street scene, and yet in the one case everyone on the street seems leisurely to saunter along, while in the other case there is a general rush and hurry. Nothing is changed but the temporal form; and in going over from the sharp image to the blurring one, nothing is changed but a certain spatial form: the content remains the same.

But the broad growth of this field and the wide range of emotional possibilities in movies isn't fully captured if we only consider the visual representation of the real world. Filmmakers have filmed the events of the world and all its wonders, have gone to the depths of the ocean and high into the clouds; they have captured animals in the jungles and in the Arctic ice; they have spent time with the most primitive communities and have recorded the greatest figures of our time. Yet, they constantly worry that they might run out of new experiences to share. Interestingly, they have largely overlooked the fact that there is an endless supply of new impressions available to them that has hardly been explored. There’s a material side and a formal side to the images we see in their quick succession. The material side is governed by the content being shown to us. But the formal side is influenced by the external conditions under which this content is presented. Even with regular photographs, we typically distinguish between those where every detail is sharp and others, which are often more artistic, where everything appears somewhat blurry and softened, avoiding harsh outlines. This formal aspect is even more pronounced when we see the same landscape or person painted by a dozen different artists. Each one has their own style. Or, consider another basic factor: the same sequence of films can be presented to us with either a slow or a fast crank turn. It’s the same street scene, yet in one version, everyone on the street seems to stroll leisurely, while in the other, there’s a sense of urgency and chaos. The only difference is the timing; similarly, shifting from a sharp image to a blurry one changes only a specific spatial aspect: the content stays the same.

As soon as we give any interest to this formal aspect of the presentation, we must recognize that the photoplaywright has here possibilities to which nothing corresponds in the world of the stage. Take the case that we want to produce an effect of trembling. We might use the pictures as the camera has taken them, sixteen in a second. But in reproducing them on the screen we change their order. After giving the first four pictures we go back to picture 3, then give 4, 5, 6, and return to 5, then 6, 7, 8, and go back to 7, and so on. Any other rhythm, of course, is equally possible. The effect is one which never occurs in nature and which could not be produced on the stage. The events for a moment go backward. A certain vibration goes through the world like the tremolo of the orchestra. Or we demand from our camera a still more complex service. We put the camera itself on a slightly rocking support and then every point must move in strange curves and every motion takes an uncanny whirling character. The content still remains the same as under normal conditions, but the changes in the formal presentation give to the mind of the spectator unusual sensations which produce a new shading of the emotional background.

As soon as we pay attention to the formal aspect of the presentation, we need to acknowledge that the photoplaywright has possibilities here that don’t exist in the theatrical world. For example, if we want to create a trembling effect. We could use the shots as the camera captures them, sixteen frames per second. However, when we display them on the screen, we alter their sequence. After showing the first four shots, we go back to shot 3, then show 4, 5, and 6, then return to 5, then 6, 7, 8, and go back to 7, and so on. Any other rhythm could also work. This effect is something that doesn't happen in nature and could not be achieved on stage. The events briefly reverse. A certain vibration sweeps through the world like the tremolo of an orchestra. Or we can ask our camera for an even more intricate task. We place the camera on a slightly rocking base, and then every point moves in strange curves, with every motion taking on an eerie swirling quality. The content remains unchanged as it would under normal conditions, but the variations in the formal presentation evoke unusual sensations in the viewer's mind, creating a new layer to the emotional backdrop.

Of course, impressions which come to our eye can at first awaken only sensations, and a sensation is not an emotion. But it is well known that in the view of modern physiological psychology our consciousness of the emotion itself is shaped and marked by the sensations which arise from our bodily organs. As soon as such abnormal visual impressions stream into our consciousness, our whole background of fusing bodily sensations becomes altered and new emotions seem to take hold of us. If we see on the screen a man hypnotized in the doctor's office, the patient himself may lie there with closed eyes, nothing in his features expressing his emotional setting and nothing radiating to us. But if now only the doctor and the patient remain unchanged and steady, while everything in the whole room begins at first to tremble and then to wave and to change its form more and more rapidly so that a feeling of dizziness comes over us and an uncanny, ghastly unnaturalness overcomes the whole surrounding of the hypnotized person, we ourselves become seized by the strange emotion. It is not worth while to go into further illustrations here, as this possibility of the camera work still belongs entirely to the future. It could not be otherwise as we remember that the whole moving picture play arose from the slavish imitation of the drama and began only slowly to find its own artistic methods. But there is no doubt that the formal changes of the pictorial presentation will be legion as soon as the photoartists give their attention to this neglected aspect.

Of course, the impressions we see can initially only trigger sensations, and a sensation isn't the same as an emotion. However, it’s well known that, according to modern physiological psychology, our awareness of the emotion itself is shaped and influenced by the sensations coming from our bodies. When abnormal visual impressions flood our consciousness, our entire backdrop of mixed bodily sensations changes, and new emotions seem to take over us. If we see a man hypnotized in the doctor's office on the screen, the patient may lie there with his eyes closed, with no expression on his face, showing no emotional state to us. But if only the doctor and the patient remain steady while everything in the room starts trembling, then waving, and changing shape more and more rapidly, causing us to feel dizzy and an eerie, ghastly unnaturalness enveloping the hypnotized person, we ourselves become affected by this strange emotion. It’s not worth diving into more examples here, as this potential of camera work belongs entirely to the future. We can’t expect otherwise, since we remember that the whole moving picture experience originated from a strict imitation of drama and only gradually began to develop its own artistic style. However, there's no doubt that the formal changes in visual presentation will be numerous as soon as photographers focus on this overlooked aspect.

The value of these formal changes for the expression of the emotions may become remarkable. The characteristic features of many an attitude and feeling which cannot be expressed without words today will then be aroused in the mind of the spectator through the subtle art of the camera.

The significance of these formal changes for expressing emotions can be quite notable. The distinctive aspects of many attitudes and feelings that can't be conveyed without words today will then be stirred in the viewer's mind through the subtle art of the camera.


PART II

THE ESTHETICS OF THE PHOTOPLAY


CHAPTER VII

THE PURPOSE OF ART

We have analyzed the mental functions which are most powerful in the audience of the photoplay. We studied the mere act of perceiving the pictures on the screen, of perceiving their apparently plastic character, their depth, and their apparent movements. We turned then to those psychical acts by which we respond to the perceived impressions. In the foreground stood the act of attention, but then we followed the play of associations, of memory, of imagination, of suggestion, and, most important of all, we traced the distribution of interest. Finally we spoke of the feelings and emotions with which we accompany the play. Certainly all this does not exhaust the mental reactions which arise in our mind when we witness a drama of the film. We have not spoken, for instance, of the action which the plot of the story or its social background may start in our soul. The suffering of the poor, the injustice by which the weak may be forced into the path of crime, and a hundred other social motives may be impressed on us by the photoplay; thoughts about human society, about laws and reforms, about human differences and human fates, may fill our mind. Yet this is not one of the characteristic functions of the moving pictures. It is a side effect which may set in just as it may result from reading the newspapers or from hearing of practical affairs in life. But in all our discussions we have also left out another mental process, namely, esthetic emotion. We did speak about the emotions which the plot of the play stirs up. We discussed the feelings in which we sympathize with the characters of the scene, in which we share their suffering and their joy; and we also spoke about that other group of emotions by which we take a mental attitude toward the behaviour of the persons in the play. But there is surely a third group of feelings and emotions which we have not yet considered, namely, those of our joy in the play, our esthetic satisfaction or dissatisfaction. We have omitted them intentionally, because the study of this group of feelings involves a discussion of the esthetic process as such, and we have left all the esthetic problems for this second part of our investigation.

We've looked at the mental processes that are most influential in how an audience experiences a film. We examined the simple act of seeing the images on the screen, noticing their seemingly three-dimensional nature, their depth, and their apparent motion. Then, we focused on the psychological responses that follow from these perceptions. At the forefront was the act of paying attention, but we also considered the flow of associations, memory, imagination, suggestion, and, most importantly, how interest is distributed. Finally, we talked about the feelings and emotions we experience while watching a film. Certainly, this discussion doesn’t cover all the mental reactions that occur when we watch a movie. For instance, we didn’t address how the story’s plot or its social context may impact us emotionally. Issues like the plight of the poor, the injustices that push the vulnerable toward crime, and many other social themes can be communicated through film; thoughts about society, laws, reforms, and human experiences can occupy our minds. However, this isn’t a defining characteristic of movies. It’s a side effect, similar to what we might feel when reading the news or hearing about real-life events. In our deliberations, we also omitted another mental process: aesthetic emotion. We discussed the emotions triggered by the plot and how we empathize with the characters’ struggles and joys, as well as our mental stance regarding their behavior. Yet, there’s definitely a third set of feelings and emotions we haven’t yet explored—our enjoyment of the film itself, our aesthetic satisfaction or dissatisfaction. We intentionally left these out because delving into this area requires a discussion of the aesthetic experience, and we’ve reserved all aesthetic issues for the second part of our study.

If we disregard this pleasure or displeasure in the beauty of the photoplay and reflect only on the processes of perception, attention, interest, memory, imagination, suggestion, and emotion which we have analyzed, we see that we everywhere come to the same result. One general principle seemed to control the whole mental mechanism of the spectator, or rather the relation between the mental mechanism and the pictures on the screen. We recognized that in every case the objective world of outer events had been shaped and molded until it became adjusted to the subjective movements of the mind. The mind develops memory ideas and imaginative ideas; in the moving pictures they become reality. The mind concentrates itself on a special detail in its act of attention; and in the close-up of the moving pictures this inner state is objectified. The mind is filled with emotions; and by means of the camera the whole scenery echoes them. Even in the most objective factor of the mind, the perception, we find this peculiar oscillation. We perceive the movement; and yet we perceive it as something which has not its independent character as an outer world process, because our mind has built it up from single pictures rapidly following one another. We perceive things in their plastic depth; and yet again the depth is not that of the outer world. We are aware of its unreality and of the pictorial flatness of the impressions.

If we ignore the pleasure or dislike in the beauty of the film and focus only on the processes of perception, attention, interest, memory, imagination, suggestion, and emotion that we have discussed, we see that we consistently arrive at the same conclusion. One overarching principle seems to govern the entire mental process of the viewer, or rather the connection between the mental process and the images on the screen. We recognized that in every instance, the external world of events has been shaped and molded until it aligns with the subjective movements of the mind. The mind develops memories and imaginative ideas; in the moving images, they become real. The mind zeroes in on a specific detail during its act of attention; and in the close-up shots of the moving pictures, this internal state is externalized. The mind is filled with emotions; and through the camera, the whole scene resonates with them. Even in the most objective aspect of the mind, perception, we observe this unique oscillation. We perceive the movement; and yet we see it as something that doesn't have an independent character as an outer world process, because our mind has constructed it from a series of rapidly successive images. We perceive things in their three-dimensional depth; yet, again, that depth is not reflective of the external world. We acknowledge its unreality and the pictorial flatness of the impressions.

In every one of these features the contrast to the mental impressions from the real stage is obvious. There in the theater we know at every moment that we see real plastic men before us, that they are really in motion when they walk and talk and that, on the other hand, it is our own doing and not a part of the play when our attention turns to this or that detail, when our memory brings back events of the past, when our imagination surrounds them with fancies and emotions. And here, it seems, we have a definite starting point for an esthetic comparison. If we raise the unavoidable question—how does the photoplay compare with the drama?—we seem to have sufficient material on hand to form an esthetic judgment. The verdict, it appears, can hardly be doubtful. Must we not say art is imitation of nature? The drama can show us on the stage a true imitation of real life. The scenes proceed just as they would happen anywhere in the outer world. Men of flesh and blood with really plastic bodies stand before us. They move like any moving body in our surroundings. Moreover those happenings on the stage, just like the events in life, are independent of our subjective attention and memory and imagination. They go their objective course. Thus the theater comes so near to its purpose of imitating the world of men that the comparison with the photoplay suggests almost a disastrous failure of the art of the film. The color of the world has disappeared, the persons are dumb, no sound reaches our ear. The depth of the scene appears unreal, the motion has lost its natural character. Worst of all, the objective course of events is falsified; our own attention and memory and imagination have shifted and remodeled the events until they look as nature could never show them. What we really see can hardly be called any longer an imitation of the world, such as the theater gives us.

In all of these features, the difference from the mental impressions of a live performance is clear. In the theater, we are constantly aware that we’re seeing real actors in front of us, that they genuinely move as they walk and talk. On the other hand, when we focus on certain details, recall past events, or let our imagination fill in the gaps, that’s our own doing and not part of the play. Here, it seems we have a clear starting point for an aesthetic comparison. If we ask the unavoidable question—how does film compare to theater?—we seem to have enough material to make an aesthetic judgment. The answer, it seems, is hardly in doubt. Shouldn’t we say art imitates nature? Theater presents a true imitation of real life on stage. The scenes unfold just as they would in the real world. Flesh-and-blood characters with real physicality stand before us. They move like anything around us. Additionally, what happens on stage, just like in life, is independent of our attention, memory, and imagination. They follow their objective course. Thus, theater gets really close to its goal of mimicking the human world, making the comparison with film feel like a significant failure of cinematic art. The color of reality fades away, the characters are mute, and no sound reaches us. The depth of the scene feels fake, and the movement has lost its natural quality. Worst of all, the objective flow of events is distorted; our attention, memory, and imagination have altered and reshaped them until they appear in ways that nature could never display. What we actually see can hardly be called an imitation of the world, as the theater provides us.

When the graphophone repeats a Beethoven symphony, the voluminousness of the orchestra is reduced to a thin feeble surface sound, and no one would accept this product of the disk and the diaphragm as a full substitute for the performance of the real orchestra. But, after all, every instrument is actually represented, and we can still discriminate the violins and the celli and the flutes in exactly the same order and tonal and rhythmic relation in which they appear in the original. The graphophone music appears, therefore, much better fitted for replacing the orchestra than the moving pictures are to be a substitute for the theater. There all the essential elements seem conserved; here just the essentials seem to be lost and the aim of the drama to imitate life with the greatest possible reality seems hopelessly beyond the flat, colorless pictures of the photoplay. Still more might we say that the plaster of Paris cast is a fair substitute for the marble statue. It shares with the beautiful marble work the same form and imitates the body of the living man just as well as the marble statue. Moreover, this product of the mechanical process has the same white color which the original work of the sculptor possesses. Hence we must acknowledge it as a fair approach to the plastic work of art. In the same way the chromo print gives the essentials of the oil painting. Everywhere the technical process has secured a reproduction of the work of art which sounds or looks almost like the work of the great artist, and only the technique of the moving pictures, which so clearly tries to reproduce the theater performance, stands so utterly far behind the art of the actor. Is not an esthetic judgment of rejection demanded by good taste and sober criticism? We may tolerate the photoplay because, by the inexpensive technical method which allows an unlimited multiplication of the performances, it brings at least a shadow of the theater to the masses who cannot afford to see real actors. But the cultivated mind might better enjoy plaster of Paris casts and chromo prints and graphophone music than the moving pictures with their complete failure to give us the essentials of the real stage.

When the graphophone plays a Beethoven symphony, the richness of the orchestra turns into a thin, weak sound, and no one would consider this disk and diaphragm version a complete replacement for a live orchestra performance. However, every instrument is still represented, and we can clearly distinguish the violins, cellos, and flutes in the same order and tonal and rhythmic relationship as in the original. Therefore, graphophone music seems much more suited to replace the orchestra than moving pictures do to substitute for theater. In theater, all the essential elements seem preserved; here, just the essentials seem to be lost, and the drama’s goal of imitating life with maximum realism appears hopelessly beyond the flat, colorless images of the film. We could also say that a plaster cast is a fair substitute for a marble statue. It shares the same shape with the beautiful marble piece and imitates the body of a living person just as well as the marble statue does. Additionally, this product of the mechanical process has the same white color as the original sculptor's work. So we must recognize it as a reasonable approximation of the plastic art. Similarly, the chromo print captures the essence of an oil painting. Everywhere, the technical process has produced a reproduction of the artwork that sounds or looks almost like the creation of the great artist, except for the technique of moving pictures, which fall far short of the actor's art. Doesn't good taste and sound criticism call for an aesthetic judgment of rejection? We may tolerate the photoplay because it uses an inexpensive technical method that allows for unlimited reproductions, bringing at least a glimpse of the theater to those who can't afford to see real actors. But someone with a cultivated mind might prefer plaster casts, chromo prints, and graphophone music over moving pictures, which completely fail to deliver the essentials of the real stage.

We have heard this message, or if it was not expressed in clear words it surely lingered for a long while in the minds of all those who had a serious relation to art. It probably still prevails today among many, even if they appreciate the more ambitious efforts of the photoplaywrights in the most recent years. The philanthropic pleasure in the furnishing of cheap entertainment and the recognition that a certain advance has recently been made seem to alleviate the esthetic situation, but the core of public opinion remains the same; the moving pictures are no real art.

We’ve heard this message, or even if it wasn’t stated clearly, it definitely stuck in the minds of everyone who had a serious connection to art. It probably still exists today among many, even if they enjoy the more ambitious efforts of filmmakers in recent years. The charitable enjoyment of providing affordable entertainment and the acknowledgment that some progress has been made lately seem to ease the aesthetic situation, but the essence of public opinion remains unchanged; movies aren’t real art.

And yet all this arguing and all this hasty settling of a most complex problem is fundamentally wrong. It is based on entirely mistaken ideas concerning the aims and purposes of art. If those errors were given up and if the right understanding of the moving pictures were to take hold of the community, nobody would doubt that the chromo print and the graphophone and the plaster cast are indeed nothing but inexpensive substitutes for art with many essential artistic elements left out, and therefore ultimately unsatisfactory to a truly artistic taste. But everybody would recognize at the same time that the relation of the photoplay to the theater is a completely different one and that the difference counts entirely in favor of the moving pictures. They are not and ought never to be imitations of the theater. They can never give the esthetic values of the theater; but no more can the theater give the esthetic values of the photoplay. With the rise of the moving pictures has come an entirely new independent art which must develop its own life conditions. The moving pictures would indeed be a complete failure if that popular theory of art which we suggested were right. But that theory is wrong from beginning to end, and it must not obstruct the way to a better insight which recognizes that the stage and the screen are as fundamentally different as sculpture and painting, or as lyrics and music. The drama and the photoplay are two coördinated arts, each perfectly valuable in itself. The one cannot replace the other; and the shortcomings of the one as against the other reflect only the fact that the one has a history of fifteen years while the other has one of five thousand. This is the thesis which we want to prove, and the first step to it must be to ask: what is the aim of art if not the imitation of reality?

And yet all this arguing and rushing to settle a very complex issue is fundamentally misguided. It is based on completely wrong ideas about the goals and purposes of art. If those mistakes were abandoned and if the right understanding of moving pictures were to take root in the community, no one would doubt that the chromo print, the graphophone, and the plaster cast are merely cheap substitutes for art, leaving out many essential artistic elements, and therefore ultimately dissatisfying to someone with true artistic taste. But everyone would also acknowledge that the relationship between the photoplay and the theater is entirely different and that this difference favors the moving pictures. They are not, and should never be, imitations of the theater. They can never replicate the aesthetic values of the theater; but the theater also cannot provide the aesthetic values of the photoplay. The emergence of moving pictures has brought about a completely new independent art that must develop its own conditions for success. Moving pictures would indeed be a total failure if that popular theory of art we mentioned were correct. But that theory is wrong from start to finish, and it must not block the path to a better understanding that recognizes that the stage and the screen are as fundamentally different as sculpture and painting, or as lyrics and music. The drama and the photoplay are two coordinated arts, each entirely valuable in its own right. One cannot replace the other, and the shortcomings of one compared to the other simply reflect the fact that one has a history of fifteen years while the other has one of five thousand. This is the argument we aim to prove, and the first step in doing so must be to ask: what is the purpose of art if not the imitation of reality?

But can the claim that art imitates nature or rather that imitation is the essence of art be upheld if we seriously look over the field of artistic creations? Would it not involve the expectation that the artistic value would be the greater, the more the ideal of imitation is approached? A perfect imitation which looks exactly like the original would give us the highest art. Yet every page in the history of art tells us the opposite. We admire the marble statue and we despise as inartistic the colored wax figures. There is no difficulty in producing colored wax figures which look so completely like real persons that the visitor at an exhibit may easily be deceived and may ask information from the wax man leaning over the railing. On the other hand what a tremendous distance between reality and the marble statue with its uniform white surface! It could never deceive us and as an imitation it would certainly be a failure. Is it different with a painting? Here the color may be quite similar to the original, but unlike the marble it has lost its depth and shows us nature on a flat surface. Again we could never be deceived, and it is not the painter's ambition to make us believe for a moment that reality is before us. Moreover neither the sculptor nor the painter gives us less valuable work when they offer us a bust or a painted head only instead of the whole figure; and yet we have never seen in reality a human body ending at the chest. We admire a fine etching hardly less than a painting. Here we have neither the plastic effect of the sculpture nor the color of the painting. The essential features of the real model are left out. As an imitation it would fail disastrously. What is imitated in a lyric poem? Through more than two thousand years we have appreciated the works of the great dramatists who had their personages speak in the rhythms of metrical language. Every iambic verse is a deviation from reality. If they had tried to imitate nature Antigone and Hamlet would have spoken the prose of daily life. Does a beautiful arch or dome or tower of a building imitate any part of reality? Is its architectural value dependent upon the similarity to nature? Or does the melody or harmony in music offer an imitation of the surrounding world?

But can we really uphold the idea that art imitates nature, or that imitation is the essence of art, if we seriously examine artistic creations? Wouldn't that imply that the artistic value increases as we get closer to the ideal of imitation? A perfect imitation that looks exactly like the original would represent the highest form of art. Yet every page in art history tells a different story. We admire marble statues and dismiss lifelike colored wax figures as lacking artistry. It’s not hard to create colored wax figures that resemble real people so closely that visitors at an exhibit might easily be fooled and even ask the wax figure for information. On the other hand, there's a huge gap between reality and the marble statue's uniform white surface! The statue could never trick us, and as an imitation, it would definitely fail. Is it different with a painting? Here, the colors might closely match the original, but unlike marble, paintings lack depth and present nature on a flat surface. Again, we could never be deceived, and the painter doesn't aim to make us believe that reality is right in front of us. Moreover, neither the sculptor nor the painter produces less valuable work when they give us just a bust or a painted head instead of the whole figure; yet we’ve never seen a human body that ends at the chest in reality. We appreciate a fine etching almost as much as a painting. It lacks the three-dimensional effect of the sculpture and the color of the painting. The essential features of the real model are omitted. What is imitated in a lyric poem? For over two thousand years, we've valued the works of great dramatists who had their characters speak in the rhythms of metrical language. Each iambic verse is a deviation from reality. If they had attempted to imitate nature, Antigone and Hamlet would have spoken in the prose of everyday life. Does a beautiful arch, dome, or tower of a building imitate any part of reality? Is its architectural value based on its similarity to nature? Or does melody or harmony in music provide an imitation of the world around us?

Wherever we examine without prejudice the mental effects of true works of art in literature or music, in painting or sculpture, in decorative arts or architecture, we find that the central esthetic value is directly opposed to the spirit of imitation. A work of art may and must start from something which awakens in us the interests of reality and which contains traits of reality, and to that extent it cannot avoid some imitation. But it becomes art just in so far as it overcomes reality, stops imitating and leaves the imitated reality behind it. It is artistic just in so far as it does not imitate reality but changes the world, selects from it special features for new purposes, remodels the world and is through this truly creative. To imitate the world is a mechanical process; to transform the world so that it becomes a thing of beauty is the purpose of art. The highest art may be furthest removed from reality.

Wherever we look without bias at the mental effects of true art in literature, music, painting, sculpture, decorative arts, or architecture, we see that the central aesthetic value is directly opposed to the spirit of imitation. A work of art may and must begin with something that sparks our interest in reality and contains elements of reality, and to that extent, it can’t avoid some imitation. But it becomes art to the degree that it transcends reality, stops mimicking, and leaves the imitated reality behind. It is artistic to the extent that it doesn’t copy reality but transforms the world, selects specific features for new purposes, reshapes the world, and through this, is truly creative. Imitating the world is a mechanical process; transforming the world so that it becomes a thing of beauty is the goal of art. The highest art may be the furthest from reality.

We have not even the right to say that this process of selection from reality means that we keep the beautiful elements of it and simply omit and eliminate the ugly ones. This again is not in the least characteristic of art, however often the popular mind may couple this superficial idea with that other one, that art consists of imitation. It is not true that the esthetic value depends upon the beauty of the selected material. The men and women whom Rembrandt painted were not beautiful persons. The ugliest woman may be the subject of a most beautiful painting. The so-called beautiful landscape may, of course, be material for a beautiful landscape painting, but the chances are great that such a pretty vista will attract the dilettante and not the real artist who knows that the true value of his painting is independent of the prettiness of the model. He knows that a muddy country road or a dirty city street or a trivial little pond may be the material for immortal pictures. He who writes literature does not select scenes of life which are beautiful in themselves, scenes which we would have liked to live through, full of radiant happiness and joy; he does not eliminate from his picture of life that which is disturbing to the peace of the soul, repellant and ugly and immoral. On the contrary, all the great works of literature have shown us dark shades of life beside the light ones. They have spoken of unhappiness and pain as often as of joy. We have suffered with our poets, and in so far as the musical composer expresses the emotions of life the great symphonies have been full of pathos and tragedy. True art has always been selection, but never selection of the beautiful elements in outer reality.

We don’t even have the right to say that this process of choosing from reality means we keep the beautiful parts and just ignore the ugly ones. This idea isn't really typical of art, even if many people mistakenly connect it with the notion that art is about imitation. It’s not true that the aesthetic value relies on the beauty of the chosen materials. The men and women Rembrandt painted weren’t conventionally beautiful. The ugliest woman can be the subject of a stunning painting. A so-called beautiful landscape might be great material for a beautiful landscape painting, but chances are it will draw in amateurs rather than the true artist, who understands that the real value of their painting doesn’t depend on how pretty the model is. They know that a muddy country road, a dirty city street, or an ordinary little pond can be the basis for timeless art. Those who write literature do not select life scenes that are inherently beautiful, scenes we would want to experience, filled with joy and happiness; they don’t avoid depicting the disturbing, repulsive, and immoral aspects of life. On the contrary, all the great literary works have shown us the darker sides of life alongside the bright ones. They have explored unhappiness and pain as often as they have joy. We have shared in the suffering of our poets, and in the same way, great symphonies convey life’s emotions, filled with pathos and tragedy. True art has always been about selection, but not the selection of only the beautiful elements in external reality.

But if the esthetic value is independent of the imitative approach to reality and independent of the elimination of unpleasant elements or of the collection and addition of pleasant traits, what does the artist really select and combine in his creation? How does he shape the world? How does nature look when it has been remolded by the artistic temperament and imagination? What is left of the real landscape when the engraver's needle has sketched it? What is left of the tragic events in real life when the lyric poet has reshaped them in a few rhymed stanzas? Perhaps we may bring the characteristic features of the process most easily to recognition if we contrast them with another kind of reshaping process. The same landscape which the artist sketches, the same historic event which the lyric poet interprets in his verses, may be grasped by the human mind in a wholly different way. We need only think of the scientific work of the scholar. He too may have the greatest interest in the landscape which the engraver has rendered: the tree on the edge of the rock, torn by the storm, and at the foot of the cliff the sea with its whitecapped waves. He too is absorbed by the tragic death of a Lincoln. But what is the scholar's attitude? Is it his aim to reproduce the landscape or the historic event? Certainly not. The meaning of science and scholarship and of knowledge in general would be completely misunderstood if their aim were thought to be simply the repeating of the special facts in reality. The scientist tries to explain the facts, and even his description is meant to serve his explanation. He turns to that tree on the cliff with the interest of studying its anatomical structure. He examines with a microscope the cells of those tissues in the branches and leaves in order that he may explain the growth of the tree and its development from the germ. The storm which whips its branches is to him a physical process for which he seeks the causes, far removed. The sea is to him a substance which he resolves in his laboratory into its chemical elements and which he explains by tracing the geological changes on the surface of the earth.

But if the aesthetic value stands apart from the imitative approach to reality and is unrelated to the removal of unpleasant elements or the gathering and addition of enjoyable traits, what does the artist actually choose and combine in his creation? How does he shape the world? What does nature look like after it has been reshaped by artistic temperament and imagination? What remains of the real landscape once the engraver's needle has sketched it? What remains of the tragic events in real life after the lyric poet has reimagined them in a few rhymed stanzas? We might recognize the key features of this process more clearly if we compare them to another type of reshaping process. The same landscape that the artist sketches, the same historical event that the lyric poet interprets in his verses, can be perceived by the human mind in a completely different way. Just think of the scholarly work of a researcher. He too may be very interested in the landscape that the engraver has portrayed: the tree at the cliff's edge, battered by the storm, and at the base of the cliff, the sea with its white-capped waves. He too is captivated by the tragic death of a Lincoln. But what is the scholar's perspective? Is his goal to reproduce the landscape or the historical event? Absolutely not. The essence of science, scholarship, and knowledge, in general, would be entirely misinterpreted if their goal were seen merely as repeating specific facts from reality. The scientist seeks to explain the facts, and even his description serves that purpose. He looks at the tree on the cliff with the intent of studying its anatomical structure. He examines the cells of its branches and leaves under a microscope to explain the tree's growth and development from its germ. The storm that lashes at its branches is, to him, a physical process for which he searches for distant causes. The sea, for him, is a substance that he breaks down in his laboratory into its chemical elements, explaining it by tracking geological changes on the earth's surface.

In short, the scientist is not interested in that particular object only, but in its connections with the total universe. He explains the event by a reference to general laws which are effective everywhere. Every single growth and movement is linked by him with the endless chain of causes and effects. He surely reshapes the experience in connecting every single impression with the totality of events, in finding the general in the particular, in transforming the given facts into the scientific scheme of an atomistic universe. It is not different from the historical event. To the scholarly historian the death of Lincoln is meaningless if it is not seen in its relation to and connection with the whole history of the Civil War and if this again is not understood as the result of the total development of the United States. And who can understand the growth of the United States, unless the whole of modern history is seen as a background and unless the ideas of state philosophy which have built up the American democracy are grasped in their connection with the whole story of European political thought in preceding centuries? The scholar may turn to natural or to social events, to waves or trees or men: every process and action in the world gains interest for him only by being connected with other things and events. Every point which he marks is the nodal point for numberless relations. To grasp a fact in the sense of scholarly knowledge means to see it in all its connections, and the work of the scholar is not simply to hold the fact as he becomes aware of it but to trace the connections and to supplement them by his thought until a completed system of interrelated facts in science or in history is established.

In short, the scientist isn't just focused on that specific object; he's interested in its connections to the entire universe. He explains events by referring to general laws that apply everywhere. He links every growth and movement to an endless chain of causes and effects. He reshapes experience by connecting every single impression to the overall events, finding the general in the specific, and transforming established facts into the scientific framework of an atomistic universe. This process isn't any different from examining historical events. To a serious historian, the death of Lincoln is insignificant unless it's viewed in relation to the larger context of the Civil War and understood as part of the overall development of the United States. And who can grasp the growth of the United States without seeing the entirety of modern history as a backdrop, or understanding the philosophical ideas of governance that shaped American democracy in connection with the broader narrative of European political thought over the centuries? The scholar can turn to natural or social events, to waves or trees or people: every process and action in the world becomes meaningful only when linked to other things and events. Every point he notes serves as a hub for countless connections. To understand a fact in an academic sense means to see it in all its connections, and the scholar's work isn't merely to acknowledge a fact but to trace its connections and enhance them with his insights until a complete system of interrelated facts in science or history is established.

Now we are better prepared to recognize the characteristic function of the artist. He is doing exactly the opposite of what the scholar is aiming at. Both are changing and remolding the given thing or event in the interest of their ideal aims. But the ideal aim of beauty and art is in complete contrast to the ideal aim of scholarly knowledge. The scholar, we see, establishes connections by which the special thing loses all character of separateness. He binds it to all the remainder of the physical and social universe. The artist, on the contrary, cuts off every possible connection. He puts his landscape into a frame so that every possible link with the surrounding world is severed. He places his statue on a pedestal so that it cannot possibly step into the room around it. He makes his persons speak in verse so that they cannot possibly be connected with the intercourse of the day. He tells his story so that nothing can happen after the last chapter. The work of art shows us the things and events perfectly complete in themselves, freed from all connections which lead beyond their own limits, that is, in perfect isolation.

Now we are better equipped to recognize the unique role of the artist. He is doing the exact opposite of what the scholar is trying to achieve. Both are altering and reshaping the given thing or event for their own ideal purposes. However, the ideal goal of beauty and art is completely different from the ideal goal of scholarly knowledge. The scholar creates links that cause the specific thing to lose its separateness. He connects it to the entire physical and social universe. The artist, on the other hand, severs every possible connection. He puts his landscape in a frame so that every possible link with the surrounding world is cut off. He places his statue on a pedestal so that it cannot interact with the space around it. He makes his characters speak in verse so that they cannot be connected with everyday conversation. He tells his story in such a way that nothing can happen after the last chapter. The work of art presents things and events as entirely complete in themselves, free from all connections that extend beyond their own boundaries, that is, in perfect isolation.

Both the truth which the scholar discovers and the beauty which the artist creates are valuable; but it is now clear that the value in both cases lies not in the mere repetition of the offerings of reality. There is no reason whatever for appreciating a mere imitation or repetition of that which exists in the world. Neither the scholar nor the artist could do better than nature or history. The value in both cases lies just in the deviation from reality in the service of human desires and ideals. The desire and ideal of the scholar is to give us an interconnected world in which we understand everything by its being linked with everything else; and the desire and ideal of the artist in every possible art is to give us things which are freed from the connection of the world and which stand before us complete in themselves. The things of the outer world have thousandfold ties with nature and history. An object becomes beautiful when it is delivered from these ties, and in order to secure this result we must take it away from the background of reality and reproduce it in such a form that it is unmistakably different from the real things which are enchained by the causes and effects of nature.

Both the truth that scholars uncover and the beauty that artists create are valuable; however, it's clear that their worth doesn’t come from simply repeating what reality offers. There's no reason to appreciate a mere imitation or repetition of what already exists in the world. Neither scholars nor artists can surpass what nature or history provides. The value in both instances lies in straying from reality to serve human desires and ideals. The scholar’s desire and ideal is to present us with an interconnected world where we understand everything as linked to everything else. The artist’s desire and ideal in every possible form of art is to present us with things that are liberated from the world's connections and stand before us complete in themselves. The objects of the outer world have countless ties to nature and history. An object becomes beautiful when it is freed from these ties; to achieve this, we must remove it from the backdrop of reality and recreate it in a way that makes it unmistakably different from real objects that are bound by the causes and effects of nature.

Why does this satisfy us? Why is it valuable to have a part of nature or life liberated from all connection with the world? Why does it make us happy to see anything in its perfect isolation, an isolation which real life seldom offers and which only art can give in complete perfection? The motives which lead us to value the product of the scholar are easily recognized. He aims toward connection. He reshapes the world until it appears connected, because that helps us to foresee the effects of every event and teaches us to master nature so that we can use it for our practical achievements. But why do we appreciate no less the opposite work which the artist is doing? Might we not answer that this enjoyment of the artistic work results from the fact that only in contact with an isolated experience can we feel perfectly happy? Whatever we meet in life or nature awakes in us desires, impulses to action, suggestions and questions which must be answered. Life is a continuous striving. Nothing is an end in itself and therefore nothing is a source of complete rest. Everything is a stimulus to new wishes, a source of new uneasiness which longs for new satisfaction in the next and again the next thing. Life pushes us forward. Yet sometimes a touch of nature comes to us; we are stirred by a thrill of life which awakens plenty of impulses but which offers satisfaction to all these impulses in itself. It does not lead beyond itself but contains in its own midst everything which answers the questions, which brings the desires to rest.

Why does this fulfill us? Why is it valuable to have a part of nature or life free from all ties to the world? Why does it make us happy to see anything in its perfect isolation, an isolation that real life rarely provides and that only art can deliver in complete perfection? The reasons we appreciate the work of scholars are clear. They strive for connection. They reshape the world until it appears interconnected, because that helps us predict the effects of every event and teaches us to control nature so we can use it for practical goals. But why do we value the artist's opposite approach just as much? Could it be that this enjoyment of art comes from the fact that only when engaging with an isolated experience can we feel truly content? Everything we encounter in life or nature stirs in us desires, urges to act, suggestions, and questions that need answers. Life is a constant effort. Nothing exists solely for itself, and thus nothing provides complete rest. Everything is a prompt for new wishes, a source of fresh unease that longs for new satisfaction in the next thing, and then the next. Life propels us forward. Yet, sometimes a touch of nature reaches us; we are ignited by a spark of life that awakens many impulses but offers fulfillment to all these impulses within itself. It doesn't lead us beyond itself but contains within it everything that answers our questions and satisfies our desires.

Wherever we meet such an offering of nature, we call it beautiful. We speak of the beautiful landscape, of the beautiful face. And wherever we meet it in life, we speak of love, of friendship, of peace, of harmony. The word harmony may even cover both nature and life. Wherever it happens that every line and every curve and every color and every movement in the landscape is so harmonious with all the others that every suggestion which one stirs up is satisfied by another, there it is perfect and we are completely happy in it. In the life relations of love and friendship and peace, there is again this complete harmony of thought and feeling and will, in which every desire is satisfied. If our own mind is in such flawless harmony, we feel the true happiness which crowns our life. Such harmony, in which every part is the complete fulfillment of that which the other parts demand, when nothing is suggested which is not fulfilled in the midst of the same experience, where nothing points beyond and everything is complete in the offering itself, must be a source of inexhaustible happiness. To remold nature and life so that it offers such complete harmony in itself that it does not point beyond its own limits but is an ultimate unity through the harmony of its parts: this is the aim of the isolation which the artist alone achieves. That restful happiness which the beautiful landscape or the harmonious life relation can furnish us in blessed instants of our struggling life is secured as a joy forever when the painter or the sculptor, the dramatist or the poet, the composer or the photoplaywright, recomposes nature and life and shows us a unity which does not lead beyond itself but is in itself perfectly harmonious.

Wherever we encounter such natural beauty, we call it beautiful. We talk about beautiful landscapes and beautiful faces. And whenever we see it in life, we mention love, friendship, peace, and harmony. The term harmony might encompass both nature and life. Whenever it happens that every line, every curve, every color, and every movement in the landscape is so in sync with all the others that every feeling one stirs up is fulfilled by another, it is perfect, and we are completely happy in it. In our relationships of love, friendship, and peace, there exists this complete harmony of thoughts, feelings, and will, where every desire is met. When our own mind is in such perfect harmony, we experience the true happiness that fulfills our lives. Such harmony, where every part completely satisfies what the other parts require, where nothing is suggested that isn't fulfilled within the same experience, where nothing points beyond and everything is complete in the offering itself, must be a source of endless happiness. To reshape nature and life so that it presents such complete harmony in itself, not pointing beyond its limits but being an ultimate unity through the harmony of its parts: this is the goal of the isolation that the artist alone achieves. That serene happiness that a beautiful landscape or a harmonious life can provide us in blissful moments of our challenging lives is secured as a lasting joy when the painter or sculptor, dramatist or poet, composer or filmmaker, reimagines nature and life and shows us a unity that doesn't lead beyond itself but is perfectly harmonious in itself.


CHAPTER VIII

THE MEANS OF THE VARIOUS ARTS

We have sought the aim which underlies all artistic creation and were led in this search to paths which seem far away from our special problem, the art of the photoplay. Yet we have steadily come nearer to it. We had to go the longer way because there can be no other method to reach a decision concerning the esthetic value and significance of the photoplay. We must clearly see what art in general aims at if we want to recognize the relative standing of the film art and the art of the theater. If we superficially accept the popular idea that the value of the photoplay is to be measured by the nearness with which it approaches the standards of the real theater and that the task of the theater is to imitate life as closely as possible, the esthetic condemnation of the photoplay is necessary. The pictures on the screen then stand far behind the actual playing on the stage in every respect. But if we find that the aim of art, including the dramatic art, is not to imitate life but to reset it in a way which is totally different from reality, then an entirely new perspective is opened. The dramatic way may then be only one of the artistic possibilities. The kinematoscopic way may be another, which may have entirely different methods and yet may be just as valuable and esthetically pure as the art of the theater. The drama and the photoplay may serve the purpose of art with equal sincerity and perfection and may reach the same goal with sharply contrasting means. Our next step, which brings us directly to the threshold of the photoplayhouse, is, accordingly, to study the difference of the various methods which the different arts use for their common purpose. What characterizes a particular art as such? When we have recognized the special traits of the traditional arts we shall be better prepared to ask whether the methods of the photoplay do not characterize this film creation also as a full-fledged art, coördinated with the older forms of beauty.

We have pursued the goal that underpins all artistic creation and have found ourselves exploring areas that seem distant from our main focus, the art of film. Yet we've gradually come closer to it. We had to take the longer route because there's no other way to determine the aesthetic value and significance of film. We need to clearly understand what art, in general, aims for if we want to evaluate the standing of film art compared to theater. If we casually accept the common idea that the value of film is measured by how closely it resembles traditional theater and that theater's job is to imitate life as closely as possible, then the aesthetic criticism of film seems justified. In that case, the images on screen fall short compared to live performances in every way. However, if we realize that the goal of art, including dramatic art, isn’t to imitate life but to reframe it in a way that’s completely different from reality, then a whole new perspective opens up. The dramatic approach might just be one of many artistic possibilities. The cinematic approach could be another, employing entirely different methods yet equally valuable and aesthetically legitimate as theater. Both drama and film can fulfill the purpose of art with the same dedication and excellence, achieving the same goals through distinctly different means. Our next step, which brings us right to the doorstep of the film theater, is to examine the differences in the methods employed by various arts for their shared purpose. What defines a specific art form? Once we recognize the unique features of traditional arts, we will be better equipped to explore whether the methods of film might also classify it as a complete art form, alongside the older forms of beauty.

We saw that the aim of every art is to isolate some object of experience in nature or social life in such a way that it becomes complete in itself, and satisfies by itself every demand which it awakens. If every desire which it stimulates is completely fulfilled by its own parts, that is, if it is a complete harmony, we, the spectators, the listeners, the readers, are perfectly satisfied, and this complete satisfaction is the characteristic esthetic joy. The first demand which is involved in this characterization of art is that the offering of the artist shall really awaken interests, as only a constant stirring up of desires together with their constant fulfillment keeps the flame of esthetic enjoyment alive. When nothing stirs us, when nothing interests us, we are in a state of indifference outside the realm of art. This also separates the esthetic pleasure from the ordinary selfish pleasures of life. They are based on the satisfaction of desires, too, but a kind of satisfaction through which the desire itself disappears. The pleasure in a meal, to be sure, can have its esthetic side, as often the harmony of the tastes and odors and sights of a rich feast may be brought to a certain artistic perfection. But mere pleasure in eating has no esthetic value, as the object is destroyed by the partaking and not only the cake disappears but also our desire for the cake when the desire is fulfilled and we are satiated. The work of art aims to keep both the demand and its fulfillment forever awake.

We noticed that the goal of every art is to focus on some aspect of nature or social life in a way that makes it complete on its own, meeting every need it creates. If every desire it stirs is fully satisfied by its own components, meaning it achieves complete harmony, we, as observers, listeners, and readers, feel totally satisfied, and this deep satisfaction is what defines aesthetic joy. The first requirement for this definition of art is that the artist's work must genuinely spark interest, as only a continuous engagement of desires along with their constant satisfaction keeps the flame of aesthetic enjoyment alive. When nothing excites us or captures our interest, we fall into a state of indifference outside the realm of art. This also distinguishes aesthetic pleasure from the everyday selfish pleasures of life. Those too are based on satisfying desires, but they do so in a way that makes the desire itself vanish. Enjoying a meal can certainly have an aesthetic aspect; sometimes the balance of flavors, aromas, and visuals of a lavish feast can reach a certain artistic perfection. However, merely enjoying food has no aesthetic value because the object is consumed, erasing not just the cake but also our desire for it once we’re full. The artwork strives to keep both the desire and its satisfaction alive indefinitely.

But then this stirring up of interests demands more than anything else a careful selection of those features in reality which ought to be admitted into the work of art. A thousand traits of the landscape are trivial and insignificant and most of what happens in the social life around us, even where a great action is going on, is in itself commonplace and dull and without consequences for the event which stirs us. The very first requirement for the artistic creation is therefore the elimination of the indifferent, the selection of those features of the complex offering of nature or social life which tell the real story, which express the true emotional values and which suggest the interest for everything which is involved in this particular episode of the world. But this leads on to the natural consequence, that the artist must not only select the important traits, but must artificially heighten their power and increase their strength. We spoke of the landscape with the tree on the rock and the roaring surf, and we saw how the scientist studies its smallest elements, the cells of the tree, the molecules of the seawater and of the rock. How differently does the artist proceed! He does not care even for the single leaves which the photographer might reproduce. If a painter renders such a landscape with his masterly brush, he gives us only the leading movements of those branches which the storm tears, and the great swing in the curve of the wave. But those forceful lines of the billows, those sharp contours of the rock, contain everything which expresses their spirit.

But then stirring up interests requires, above all, a careful choice of the aspects of reality that should be included in the artwork. A thousand features of the landscape are trivial and unimportant, and most of what happens in our social lives, even during significant events, is ultimately ordinary and boring and has no real impact on what moves us. The very first requirement for artistic creation is, therefore, removing the irrelevant details, selecting those aspects of the rich offerings of nature or social life that convey the real story, express genuine emotional values, and capture the interest related to this specific episode in the world. This naturally leads to the conclusion that the artist must not only choose the important traits but also artificially enhance their impact and amplify their strength. We talked about the landscape with the tree on the rock and the crashing surf, and we saw how the scientist examines its smallest elements, the cells of the tree, the molecules of the seawater, and the rock. The artist, however, approaches it quite differently! He doesn't even concern himself with the individual leaves that a photographer might capture. When a painter depicts such a landscape with his skilled brush, he presents only the main movements of the branches that the storm pulls, and the grand curve of the wave. Yet those powerful lines of the waves and those sharp outlines of the rock encapsulate everything that conveys their spirit.

It is not different with the author who writes a historical novel or drama. Every man's life is crowded with the trivialities of the day. The scholarly historian may have to look into them; the artist selects those events in his hero's life which truly express his personality and which are fit to sustain the significant plot. The more he brings those few elements out of the many into sharp relief, the more he stimulates our interest and makes us really feel with the persons of his novel or drama. The sculptor even selects one single position. He cannot, like the painter, give us any background, he cannot make his hero move as on the theater stage. The marble statue makes the one position of the hero everlasting, but this is so selected that all the chance aspects and fleeting gestures of the real man appear insignificant compared with the one most expressive and most characteristic position which is chosen.

It’s the same for authors who write historical novels or dramas. Everyone’s life is packed with everyday trivialities. The scholarly historian may need to examine these details; the artist, however, picks out the events in his hero’s life that truly reflect their personality and are essential to the main story. The more he highlights those few significant elements from the many, the more he captures our interest and helps us genuinely connect with the characters in his novel or drama. The sculptor even chooses one single pose. Unlike the painter, he can’t provide any background or make his hero move like they would on stage. The marble statue immortalizes the hero in that one pose, selected so that all the random aspects and fleeting gestures of a real person seem unimportant compared to the one most expressive and defining position chosen.

However far this selection of the essential traits removes the artistic creation from the mere imitative reproduction of the world, a much greater distance from reality results from a second need if the work is to fulfill the purposes of art. We saw that we have art only when the work is isolated, that is, when it fulfills every demand in itself and does not point beyond itself. This can be done only if it is sharply set off from the sphere of our practical interests. Whatever enters into our practical sphere links itself with our impulses to real action and the action would involve a change, an intrusion, an influence from without. As long as we have the desire to change anything, the work is not complete in itself. The relation of the work to us as persons must not enter into our awareness of it at all. As soon as it does, that complete restfulness of the esthetic enjoyment is lost. Then the object becomes simply a part of our practical surroundings. The fundamental condition of art, therefore, is that we shall be distinctly conscious of the unreality of the artistic production, and that means that it must be absolutely separated from the real things and men, that it must be isolated and kept in its own sphere. As soon as a work of art tempts us to take it as a piece of reality, it has been dragged into the sphere of our practical action, which means our desire to put ourselves into connection with it. Its completeness in itself is lost and its value for our esthetic enjoyment has faded away.

No matter how much this selection of essential traits distances artistic creation from simply imitating the world, an even greater gap from reality comes from a second necessity for the work to achieve the goals of art. We established that art exists only when a work is self-contained, meaning it meets all its requirements on its own and doesn’t point beyond itself. This can only happen if it is clearly distinguished from our practical concerns. Anything that enters our practical sphere attaches itself to our impulses for real action, and that action would imply a change, an intrusion, an outside influence. As long as we want to change anything, the work isn’t complete within itself. Our connection to the work must not enter into our perception of it at all. As soon as it does, the complete calm of aesthetic enjoyment is lost. The object then becomes just a part of our practical surroundings. Therefore, the fundamental condition of art is that we must be clearly aware of the unreality of the artistic creation, which means it has to be completely separated from real things and people; it has to be isolated and kept in its own realm. As soon as a work of art encourages us to view it as a piece of reality, it has been pulled into the realm of our practical actions, which indicates our desire to engage with it. Its completeness as a standalone piece is lost, and its value for our aesthetic enjoyment diminishes.

Now we understand why it is necessary that each art should have its particular method for fundamentally changing reality. Now we recognize that it is by no means a weakness of sculpture that the marble statue has not the colors of life but a whiteness unlike any human being. Nor does it appear a deficiency in the painting or the drawing that it can offer two dimensions only and has no means to show us the depth of real nature. Now we grasp why the poet expresses his feelings and thoughts in the entirely unnatural language of rhythms and rhymes. Now we see why every work of art has its frame or its base or its stage. Everything serves that central purpose, the separation of the offered experience from the background of our real life. When we have a painted garden before us, we do not want to pick the flowers from the beds and break the fruit from the branches. The flatness of the picture tells us that this is no reality, in spite of the fact that the size of the painting may not be different from that of the windowpane through which we see a real garden. We have no thought of bringing a chair or a warm coat for the woman in marble. The work which the sculptor created stands before us in a space into which we cannot enter, and because it is entirely removed from the reality toward which our actions are directed we become esthetic spectators only. The smile of the marble girl wins us as if it came from a living one, but we do not respond to her welcome. Just as she appears in her marble form she is complete in herself without any relation to us or to anyone else. The very difference from reality has given her that self-sustained perfect life.

Now we understand why it’s essential for each art form to have its unique approach to fundamentally changing reality. We realize that it's not a limitation of sculpture that a marble statue lacks the colors of life and has a whiteness that's unlike any person. Similarly, it’s not a shortcoming of painting or drawing that they can only present two dimensions and can't show us the depth of actual nature. Now we see why a poet articulates his feelings and thoughts in the entirely artificial language of rhythms and rhymes. We recognize why every piece of art has its frame, base, or stage. Everything serves that main purpose: separating the experience being offered from the backdrop of our real life. When we have a painted garden in front of us, we don't want to pick the flowers or pluck the fruit from the branches. The flatness of the artwork indicates that this is not reality, even though the size of the painting might be similar to that of the window through which we see a real garden. We have no intention of bringing a chair or a warm coat for the woman in marble. The work created by the sculptor stands before us in a space we can't enter, and since it is completely detached from the reality our actions are aimed at, we become mere aesthetic spectators. The smile of the marble girl captivates us as if it came from a living person, but we don’t respond to her welcome. Just as she exists in her marble form, she is complete in herself, with no relation to us or anyone else. This very difference from reality has granted her that self-sufficient, perfect life.

If we read in a police report about burglaries, we may lock our house more securely; if we read about a flood, we may send our mite; if we read about an elopement, we may try to find out what happened later. But if we read about all these in a short story, we have esthetic enjoyment only if the author somehow makes it perfectly clear to us by the form of the description that this burglary and flood and elopement do not belong to our real surroundings and exist only in the world of imagination. The extreme case comes to us in the theater performance. We see there real human beings a few feet from us; we see in the melodrama how the villain approaches his victim from behind with a dagger; we feel indignation and anger: and yet we have not the slightest desire to jump up on the stage and stay his arm. The artificial setting of the stage, the lighted proscenium before the dark house, have removed the whole action from the world which is connected with our own deeds. The consciousness of unreality, which the theater has forced on us, is the condition for our dramatic interest in the events presented. If we were really deceived and only for a moment took the stage quarrel and stage crime to be real, we would at once be removed from the height of esthetic joy to the level of common experience.

If we read in a police report about burglaries, we might secure our home more effectively; if we read about a flood, we might donate; if we read about a runaway couple, we might try to find out what happened later. But when we read about these events in a short story, we can only enjoy it aesthetically if the author clearly shows us through their description that this burglary, flood, and elopement exist only in the realm of imagination and not in our real lives. The extreme example of this is in theater performances. We see real people just a few feet away; we watch in a melodrama as the villain sneaks up on their victim with a dagger; we feel indignation and anger, yet we have no urge to jump on stage and stop them. The artificial setting of the stage, with the lit area in front of the dark audience, separates the whole action from the world linked to our own actions. The awareness of this unreality, which theater makes us conscious of, is the condition for our dramatic interest in what’s happening. If we were truly deceived and for just a moment believed that the stage fight and stage crime were real, we would instantly drop from the height of aesthetic pleasure to the level of ordinary experience.

We must take one step more. We need not only the complete separation from reality by the changed forms of experience, but we must demand also that this unreal thing or event shall be complete in itself. The artist, therefore, must do whatever is needed to satisfy the demands which any part awakens. If one line in the painting suggests a certain mood and movement, the other lines must take it up and the colors must sympathize with it and they all must agree with the pictured content. The tension which one scene in the drama awakens must be relieved by another. Nothing must remain unexplained and nothing unfinished. We do not want to know what is going on behind the hills of the landscape painting or what the couple in the comedy will do after the engagement in the last act. On the other hand, if the artist adds elements which are in harmony with the demands of the other parts, they are esthetically valuable, however much they may differ from the actual happenings in the outer world. In the painting the mermaid may have her tail and the sculptured child may have his angel wings and fairies may appear on the stage. In short, every demand which is made by the purpose of true art removes us from reality and is contrary to the superficial claim that art ought to rest on skillful imitation. The true victory of art lies in the overcoming of the real appearance and every art is genuine which fulfills this esthetic desire for history or for nature, in its own way.

We need to take one more step. We require not only a complete break from reality through altered forms of experience, but we also need to ensure that this unreal thing or event stands alone. Therefore, the artist must do whatever it takes to meet the demands that any part of the work creates. If one line in the painting evokes a certain mood and movement, the other lines must reflect that, and the colors must resonate with it, all aligning with the depicted content. The tension created by one scene in the drama must be eased by another. Nothing should be left unexplained, and nothing should be unfinished. We aren't interested in knowing what lies beyond the hills in a landscape painting or what the couple in the comedy will do after their engagement in the final act. On the flip side, if the artist introduces elements that harmonize with the demands of the other parts, they become aesthetically valuable, regardless of how much they diverge from actual events in the real world. In the painting, the mermaid can have a tail, the sculpted child can have angel wings, and fairies can appear on stage. In short, every demand posed by the true purpose of art pulls us away from reality and contradicts the superficial idea that art should rely on skillful imitation. The true triumph of art lies in transcending real appearances, and every piece of art is genuine that satisfies this aesthetic craving for history or nature in its own way.

The number of ways cannot be determined beforehand. By the study of painting and etching and drawing merely, we could not foresee that there is also possible an art like sculpture, and by studying epic and lyric poetry we could not construct beforehand the forms of the drama. The genius of mankind had to discover ever new forms in which the interest in reality is conserved and yet the things and events are so completely changed that they are separated from all possible reality, isolated from all connections and made complete in themselves. We have not yet spoken about the one art which gives us this perfect satisfaction in the isolated material, satisfies every demand which it awakens, and yet which is further removed from the reality we know than any other artistic creation, music. Those tones with which the composer builds up his melodies and harmonies are not parts of the world in which we live at all. None of our actions in practical life is related to tones from musical instruments, and yet the tones of a symphony may arouse in us the deepest emotions, the most solemn feelings and the most joyful ones. They are symbols of our world which bring with them its sadness and its happiness. We feel the rhythm of the tones, fugitive, light and joyful, or quiet, heavy and sustained, and they impress us as energies which awaken our own impulses, our own tensions and relaxations.

The number of ways can't be determined ahead of time. Just by studying painting, etching, and drawing, we couldn't predict that there could also be an art form like sculpture, and by looking at epic and lyric poetry, we couldn't foresee the structures of drama. Humanity's creativity had to continually come up with new forms to capture our interest in reality while transforming things and events so completely that they become detached from any possible reality, isolated from all connections, and made complete in themselves. We haven't yet mentioned the one art that provides us with perfect satisfaction in its isolated material, fulfilling every expectation it stirs, and yet is further apart from the reality we know than any other artistic creation: music. The notes that a composer uses to create melodies and harmonies don't belong to the world we live in at all. None of our everyday actions are related to the sounds from musical instruments, and yet a symphony can evoke our deepest emotions, the most serious feelings, and the greatest joys. These tones are symbols of our world, bringing its sadness and happiness. We feel the rhythm of the sounds—fugitive, light, and joyful, or calm, heavy, and sustained—and they resonate with us as energies that awaken our own impulses, tensions, and relaxations.

We enter into the play of those tones which with their intervals and their instrumental tone color appear like a wonderful mosaic of agreements and disagreements. Yet each disagreement resolves itself into a new agreement. Those tones seek one another. They have a life of their own, complete in itself. We do not want to change it. Our mind simply echoes their desires and their satisfaction. We feel with them and are happy in their ultimate agreement without which no musical melody would be beautiful. Bound by the inner law which is proclaimed by the first tones every coming tone is prepared. The whole tone movement points toward the next one. It is a world of inner self-agreement like that of the colors in a painting, of the curves in a work of sculpture, like the rhythms and rhymes in a stanza. But beyond the mere self-agreement of the tones and rhythms as such, the musical piece as a whole unveils to us a world of emotion. Music does not depict the physical nature which fine arts bring to us, nor the social world which literature embraces, but the inner world with its abundance of feelings and excitements. It isolates our inner experience and within its limits brings it to that perfect self-agreement which is the characteristic of every art.

We engage with the play of these tones, which, with their intervals and instrumental colors, come together like a beautiful mosaic of harmony and discord. Yet every disagreement transforms into a new harmony. These tones seek each other out. They have their own life, complete in itself. We don't want to change that. Our minds just reflect their desires and their satisfaction. We feel with them and are joyful in their ultimate harmony, which is essential for any musical melody to be beautiful. Bound by the inner law expressed by the first tones, every subsequent tone is prepared. The entire movement of tones leads to the next one. It's a world of internal agreement, just like the colors in a painting, the curves in a sculpture, or the rhythms and rhymes in a verse. But beyond the mere agreement of tones and rhythms, the musical piece as a whole reveals to us a world of emotion. Music doesn't depict the physical nature that fine arts present, nor the social world that literature covers, but the inner world with its rich array of feelings and experiences. It isolates our inner experiences and, within its bounds, brings them to that perfect self-agreement that characterizes every form of art.

We might easily trace further the various means by which each particular art overcomes the chaos of the world and renders a part of it in a perfectly isolated form in which all elements are in mutual agreement. We might develop out of this fundamental demand of art all the special forms which are characteristic in its various fields. We might also turn to the applied arts, to architecture, to arts and crafts, and so on and see how new rules must arise from the combination of purely artistic demands and those of practical utility. But this would lead us too far into esthetic theory, while our aim is to push forward toward the problem of the photoplay. Of painting, of drama, and of music we had to speak because with them the photoplay does share certain important conditions and accordingly certain essential forms of rendering the world. Each element of the photoplay is a picture, flat like that which the painter creates, and the pictorial character is fundamental for the art of the film. But surely the photoplay shares many conditions with the drama on the stage. The presentation of conflicting action among men in dramatic scenes is the content, on the stage as on the screen. Our chief claim, however, was that we falsify the meaning of the photoplay if we simply subordinate it to the esthetic conditions of the drama. It is different from mere pictures and it is different from the drama, too, however much relation it has to both. But we come nearer to the understanding of its true position in the esthetic world, if we think at the same time of that other art upon which we touched, the art of the musical tones. They have overcome the outer world and the social world entirely, they unfold our inner life, our mental play, with its feelings and emotions, its memories and fancies, in a material which seems exempt from the laws of the world of substance and material, tones which are fluttering and fleeting like our own mental states. Of course, a photoplay is not a piece of music. Its material is not sound but light. But the photoplay is not music in the same sense in which it is not drama and not pictures. It shares something with all of them. It stands somewhere among and apart from them and just for this reason it is an art of a particular type which must be understood through its own conditions and for which its own esthetic rules must be traced instead of drawing them simply from the rules of the theater.

We could easily explore the different ways each specific art deals with the chaos of the world and presents a part of it in a completely isolated form where all elements harmonize. From this basic need for art, we could develop all the unique forms characteristic of in its various domains. We could also look at applied arts, architecture, crafts, and so on, and see how new rules emerge from combining purely artistic needs with practical usefulness. But that would take us too deep into aesthetic theory, while our goal is to advance toward the issue of the photoplay. We had to discuss painting, drama, and music because the photoplay shares certain important conditions and, therefore, some essential forms of portraying the world. Each element of the photoplay is an image, flat like what a painter creates, and this pictorial aspect is fundamental to the art of film. However, the photoplay also shares many conditions with stage drama. The depiction of conflicting actions among people in dramatic scenes is the content, both on stage and on screen. Our main argument, though, is that we distort the meaning of the photoplay if we simply reduce it to the aesthetic conditions of drama. It is distinct from mere images and from drama, even though it relates to both. We get closer to understanding its true place in the aesthetic realm if we think about another art form we mentioned, the art of music. Music completely transcends the physical and social world; it expresses our inner lives, our mental activities with feelings and emotions, memories and fantasies, in a medium that seems free from the laws of the material world, with tones that are fleeting and ephemeral like our mental states. Certainly, a photoplay is not a piece of music. Its medium is not sound but light. However, the photoplay is not music in the same way it is not drama or just images. It shares elements with all of them. It occupies a position among and apart from them, and for this reason, it is a unique type of art that must be understood through its own conditions, for which its distinct aesthetic rules need to be established—rather than simply adopting the rules from theater.


CHAPTER IX

THE MEANS OF THE PHOTOPLAY

We have now reached the point at which we can knot together all our threads, the psychological and the esthetic ones. If we do so, we come to the true thesis of this whole book. Our esthetic discussion showed us that it is the aim of art to isolate a significant part of our experience in such a way that it is separate from our practical life and is in complete agreement within itself. Our esthetic satisfaction results from this inner agreement and harmony, but in order that we may feel such agreement of the parts we must enter with our own impulses into the will of every element, into the meaning of every line and color and form, every word and tone and note. Only if everything is full of such inner movement can we really enjoy the harmonious coöperation of the parts. The means of the various arts, we saw, are the forms and methods by which this aim is fulfilled. They must be different for every material. Moreover the same material may allow very different methods of isolation and elimination of the insignificant and reënforcement of that which contributes to the harmony. If we ask now what are the characteristic means by which the photoplay succeeds in overcoming reality, in isolating a significant dramatic story and in presenting it so that we enter into it and yet keep it away from our practical life and enjoy the harmony of the parts, we must remember all the results to which our psychological discussion in the first part of the book has led us.

We have now reached the point where we can bring together all our ideas, both psychological and aesthetic. If we do this, we arrive at the true thesis of this entire book. Our discussion on aesthetics showed us that the goal of art is to highlight a significant part of our experience in a way that separates it from our everyday lives and is fully cohesive within itself. Our aesthetic pleasure comes from this inner agreement and harmony, but to truly feel this alignment of parts, we must engage our own impulses with the intent of every element, the meaning of each line and color and shape, every word, sound, and note. Only when everything is filled with this inner movement can we genuinely appreciate the harmonious collaboration of the parts. The means of various arts, as we observed, are the forms and methods through which this goal is achieved. They need to differ for each medium. Additionally, the same medium can offer very different methods of isolating and removing the insignificant while enhancing what contributes to the harmony. If we now ask what the key means are by which film succeeds in overcoming reality, in isolating a significant dramatic story, and in presenting it so that we engage with it while keeping it apart from our practical lives and enjoying the harmony of its parts, we must recall all the conclusions our psychological discussion in the first part of the book has led us to.

We recognized there that the photoplay, incomparable in this respect with the drama, gave us a view of dramatic events which was completely shaped by the inner movements of the mind. To be sure, the events in the photoplay happen in the real space with its depth. But the spectator feels that they are not presented in the three dimensions of the outer world, that they are flat pictures which only the mind molds into plastic things. Again the events are seen in continuous movement; and yet the pictures break up the movement into a rapid succession of instantaneous impressions. We do not see the objective reality, but a product of our own mind which binds the pictures together. But much stronger differences came to light when we turned to the processes of attention, of memory, of imagination, of suggestion, of division of interest and of emotion. The attention turns to detailed points in the outer world and ignores everything else: the photoplay is doing exactly this when in the close-up a detail is enlarged and everything else disappears. Memory breaks into present events by bringing up pictures of the past: the photoplay is doing this by its frequent cut-backs, when pictures of events long past flit between those of the present. The imagination anticipates the future or overcomes reality by fancies and dreams; the photoplay is doing all this more richly than any chance imagination would succeed in doing. But chiefly, through our division of interest our mind is drawn hither and thither. We think of events which run parallel in different places. The photoplay can show in intertwined scenes everything which our mind embraces. Events in three or four or five regions of the world can be woven together into one complex action. Finally, we saw that every shade of feeling and emotion which fills the spectator's mind can mold the scenes in the photoplay until they appear the embodiment of our feelings. In every one of these aspects the photoplay succeeds in doing what the drama of the theater does not attempt.

We realized there that the film, unlike the stage play, offers a view of dramatic events that is entirely shaped by our inner thoughts. Sure, the events in the film take place in real space and have depth. But the audience senses that they aren't displayed in the three dimensions of the outside world; they're flat images that the mind transforms into realistic scenes. Once again, the events appear in continuous motion, yet the images break the movement into a quick succession of fleeting impressions. We don’t see objective reality but rather a product of our own mind that connects the images. More significant differences emerged when we examined attention, memory, imagination, suggestion, division of interest, and emotion. Attention focuses on specific details in the outer world while ignoring everything else: the film does this when a close-up highlights a detail and everything else fades away. Memory interrupts present events by recalling images of the past: the film achieves this through its frequent flashbacks, where memories of past events flit between current scenes. Imagination anticipates the future or escapes reality through fantasies and dreams; the film presents this much more richly than any random imagination could. Primarily, through our division of interest, our minds are pulled in different directions. We think of events that occur simultaneously in various places. The film can showcase intertwined scenes, encapsulating everything our minds can grasp. Events across three, four, or five regions of the world can be interwoven into a single complex narrative. Lastly, we noticed that every nuance of feeling and emotion that fills the spectator's mind can shape the scenes in the film until they seem like the embodiment of our feelings. In every one of these aspects, the film achieves what the theater does not even attempt.

If this is the outcome of esthetic analysis on the one side, of psychological research on the other, we need only combine the results of both into a unified principle: the photoplay tells us the human story by overcoming the forms of the outer world, namely, space, time, and causality, and by adjusting the events to the forms of the inner world, namely, attention, memory, imagination, and emotion.

If this is the result of aesthetic analysis on one side and psychological research on the other, we just need to merge the findings from both into a single principle: the film conveys the human story by transcending the constraints of the external world, such as space, time, and causality, and by aligning the events with the aspects of the internal world, including attention, memory, imagination, and emotion.

We shall gain our orientation most directly if once more, under this point of view, we compare the photoplay with the performance on the theater stage. We shall not enter into a discussion of the character of the regular theater and its drama. We take this for granted. Everybody knows that highest art form which the Greeks created and which from Greece has spread over Asia, Europe, and America. In tragedy and in comedy from ancient times to Ibsen, Rostand, Hauptmann, and Shaw we recognize one common purpose and one common form for which no further commentary is needed. How does the photoplay differ from a theater performance? We insisted that every work of art must be somehow separated from our sphere of practical interests. The theater is no exception. The structure of the theater itself, the framelike form of the stage, the difference of light between stage and house, the stage setting and costuming, all inhibit in the audience the possibility of taking the action on the stage to be real life. Stage managers have sometimes tried the experiment of reducing those differences, for instance, keeping the audience also in a fully lighted hall, and they always had to discover how much the dramatic effect was reduced because the feeling of distance from reality was weakened. The photoplay and the theater in this respect are evidently alike. The screen too suggests from the very start the complete unreality of the events.

We can understand our perspective more clearly if we compare the film with a live theater performance once again from this viewpoint. We won’t dive into a discussion about the nature of traditional theater and its drama; that’s a given. Everyone knows about the highest form of art created by the Greeks, which has spread from Greece to Asia, Europe, and America. In both tragedy and comedy, from ancient times through to Ibsen, Rostand, Hauptmann, and Shaw, we see a shared purpose and a common form that doesn’t need further explanation. So, how does the film differ from a theater performance? We emphasized that every work of art must be somewhat distinct from our practical interests, and theater is no exception. The very structure of the theater—the framed stage, the lighting differences between the stage and the audience, and the set and costumes—prevents the audience from perceiving the stage action as real life. Stage managers have occasionally experimented with reducing those differences, for example, by keeping the audience in a fully lit room, and they’ve always found that the dramatic impact diminished because the sense of separation from reality was lessened. Clearly, the film and the theater are alike in this regard. The screen also immediately conveys the complete unreality of the events.

But each further step leads us to remarkable differences between the stage play and the film play. In every respect the film play is further away from the physical reality than the drama and in every respect this greater distance from the physical world brings it nearer to the mental world. The stage shows us living men. It is not the real Romeo and not the real Juliet; and yet the actor and the actress have the ringing voices of true people, breathe like them, have living colors like them, and fill physical space like them. What is left in the photoplay? The voice has been stilled: the photoplay is a dumb show. Yet we must not forget that this alone is a step away from reality which has often been taken in the midst of the dramatic world. Whoever knows the history of the theater is aware of the tremendous rôle which the pantomime has played in the development of mankind. From the old half-religious pantomimic and suggestive dances out of which the beginnings of the real drama grew to the fully religious pantomimes of medieval ages and, further on, to many silent mimic elements in modern performances, we find a continuity of conventions which make the pantomime almost the real background of all dramatic development. We know how popular the pantomimes were among the Greeks, and how they stood in the foreground in the imperial period of Rome. Old Rome cherished the mimic clowns, but still more the tragic pantomimics. "Their very nod speaks, their hands talk and their fingers have a voice." After the fall of the Roman empire the church used the pantomime for the portrayal of sacred history, and later centuries enjoyed very unsacred histories in the pantomimes of their ballets. Even complex artistic tragedies without words have triumphed on our present-day stage. "L'Enfant Prodigue" which came from Paris, "Sumurun" which came from Berlin, "Petroushka" which came from Petrograd, conquered the American stage; and surely the loss of speech, while it increased the remoteness from reality, by no means destroyed the continuous consciousness of the bodily existence of the actors.

But each step we take reveals significant differences between the stage play and the film play. In every way, the film play strays further from physical reality than the drama, and this increased distance from the physical world connects it more closely to the mental world. The stage presents us with real people. It’s not the actual Romeo or the actual Juliet; yet the actor and actress have the vibrant voices of real individuals, breathe like them, have living colors just like them, and occupy physical space like them. What remains in the photoplay? The voice has been silenced: the photoplay becomes a silent performance. Yet we must remember that this is just one step away from reality, which has often been taken within the dramatic world. Anyone familiar with the history of theater knows the significant role pantomime has played in human development. From the ancient half-religious pantomimic and suggestive dances that led to the real drama's beginnings to the fully religious pantomimes of the medieval ages, and on to the silent mimicking elements in modern performances, we see a continuity of traditions that make the pantomime almost the true foundation of all dramatic progress. We recognize how popular pantomimes were among the Greeks and how prominent they were during the imperial period of Rome. Ancient Rome held the mimic clowns in high regard, but appreciated the tragic pantomimists even more. "Their very nod speaks, their hands talk, and their fingers have a voice." After the fall of the Roman Empire, the church utilized pantomime to depict sacred stories, and later ages indulged in very secular tales through their ballet pantomimes. Even intricate artistic tragedies without words have thrived on our modern stage. "L'Enfant Prodigue," which came from Paris, "Sumurun," which came from Berlin, and "Petroushka," which came from Petrograd, all conquered the American stage; and surely, the absence of speech, while it heightened the distance from reality, did not eliminate the ongoing awareness of the actors' physical presence.

Moreover the student of a modern pantomime cannot overlook a characteristic difference between the speechless performance on the stage and that of the actors of a photoplay. The expression of the inner states, the whole system of gestures, is decidedly different: and here we might say that the photoplay stands nearer to life than the pantomime. Of course, the photoplayer must somewhat exaggerate the natural expression. The whole rhythm and intensity of his gestures must be more marked than it would be with actors who accompany their movements by spoken words and who express the meaning of their thoughts and feelings by the content of what they say. Nevertheless the photoplayer uses the regular channels of mental discharge. He acts simply as a very emotional person might act. But the actor who plays in a pantomime cannot be satisfied with that. He is expected to add something which is entirely unnatural, namely a kind of artificial demonstration of his emotions. He must not only behave like an angry man, but he must behave like a man who is consciously interested in his anger and wants to demonstrate it to others. He exhibits his emotions for the spectators. He really acts theatrically for the benefit of the bystanders. If he did not try to do so, his means of conveying a rich story and a real conflict of human passions would be too meager. The photoplayer, with the rapid changes of scenes, has other possibilities of conveying his intentions. He must not yield to the temptation to play a pantomime on the screen, or he will seriously injure the artistic quality of the reel.

Moreover, a student of modern pantomime can't ignore a key difference between the silent performances on stage and those of actors in a film. The expression of internal states, along with the entire system of gestures, is noticeably different: in fact, we could say that film acting is closer to real life than pantomime. Of course, the film actor needs to exaggerate natural expressions a bit. The rhythm and intensity of their gestures must be more pronounced than for actors who use spoken words to accompany their movements and convey their thoughts and feelings through dialogue. Still, the film actor uses the usual channels of emotional expression. They act as someone very emotional would act. But the actor in a pantomime can’t just do that. They’re expected to add something that's completely unnatural, specifically an exaggerated display of their emotions. They have to not only act like an angry person but also like someone who is fully aware of their anger and wants to show it to others. They showcase their emotions for the audience. They really perform for the benefit of the bystanders. If they didn't, their ability to tell a rich story and portray real human conflicts would be too limited. The film actor, with the quick scene changes, has different ways to convey their intentions. They must resist the urge to act like a pantomime on screen, or they will significantly damage the artistic quality of the film.

The really decisive distance from bodily reality, however, is created by the substitution of the actor's picture for the actor himself. Lights and shades replace the manifoldness of color effects and mere perspective must furnish the suggestion of depth. We traced it when we discussed the psychology of kinematoscopic perception. But we must not put the emphasis on the wrong point. The natural tendency might be to lay the chief stress on the fact that those people in the photoplay do not stand before us in flesh and blood. The essential point is rather that we are conscious of the flatness of the picture. If we were to see the actors of the stage in a mirror, it would also be a reflected image which we perceive. We should not really have the actors themselves in our straight line of vision; and yet this image would appear to us equivalent to the actors themselves, because it would contain all the depth of the real stage. The film picture is such a reflected rendering of the actors. The process which leads from the living men to the screen is more complex than a mere reflection in a mirror, but in spite of the complexity in the transmission we do, after all, see the real actor in the picture. The photograph is absolutely different from those pictures which a clever draughtsman has sketched. In the photoplay we see the actors themselves and the decisive factor which makes the impression different from seeing real men is not that we see the living persons through the medium of photographic reproduction but that this reproduction shows them in a flat form. The bodily space has been eliminated. We said once before that stereoscopic arrangements could reproduce somewhat this plastic form also. Yet this would seriously interfere with the character of the photoplay. We need there this overcoming of the depth, we want to have it as a picture only and yet as a picture which strongly suggests to us the actual depth of the real world. We want to keep the interest in the plastic world and want to be aware of the depth in which the persons move, but our direct object of perception must be without the depth. That idea of space which forces on us most strongly the idea of heaviness, solidity and substantiality must be replaced by the light flitting immateriality.

The significant gap from physical reality is actually created by swapping the actor's image for the actor themselves. Lighting and shadows take the place of various color effects, and simple perspective has to suggest depth. We identified this when we talked about the psychology of film perception. But we shouldn't focus on the wrong aspect. The natural inclination might be to emphasize that the people in the film aren’t physically present. The crucial point is that we are aware of the flatness of the image. If we were to see stage actors in a mirror, it would still be a reflected image we perceive. We wouldn't actually see the actors in our direct line of sight; yet, this reflection would appear equivalent to the actors themselves because it would capture all the depth of a real stage. The film image is like a reflected version of the actors. The process that goes from live people to the screen is more complicated than just a mirror reflection, but despite this complexity in transmission, we still see the real actor in the image. Photography is entirely different from images sketched by a skilled artist. In a film, we see the actors themselves, and the key factor that makes the impression different from seeing real people is not that we view the living individuals through photographic reproduction, but that this reproduction presents them in a flat form. The physical space has been removed. We previously mentioned that stereoscopic setups could somewhat recreate this three-dimensional form. However, this would greatly alter the nature of the film. Here, we need to overcome the sense of depth; we want to see it as a picture only, but one that powerfully suggests the actual depth of the real world. We want to maintain our interest in the three-dimensional world and be aware of the depth in which the characters exist, but our primary focus must be on the image without depth. That concept of space that strongly conveys heaviness, solidity, and substance must be replaced by a light, fleeting immateriality.

But the photoplay sacrifices not only the space values of the real theater; it disregards no less its order of time. The theater presents its plot in the time order of reality. It may interrupt the continuous flow of time without neglecting the conditions of the dramatic art. There may be twenty years between the third and the fourth act, inasmuch as the dramatic writer must select those elements spread over space and time which are significant for the development of his story. But he is bound by the fundamental principle of real time, that it can move only forward and not backward. Whatever the theater shows us now must come later in the story than that which it showed us in any previous moment. The strict classical demand for complete unity of time does not fit every drama, but a drama would give up its mission if it told us in the third act something which happened before the second act. Of course, there may be a play within a play, and the players on the stage which is set on the stage may play events of old Roman history before the king of France. But this is an enclosure of the past in the present, which corresponds exactly to the actual order of events. The photoplay, on the other hand, does not and must not respect this temporal structure of the physical universe. At any point the photoplay interrupts the series and brings us back to the past. We studied this unique feature of the film art when we spoke of the psychology of memory and imagination. With the full freedom of our fancy, with the whole mobility of our association of ideas, pictures of the past flit through the scenes of the present. Time is left behind. Man becomes boy; today is interwoven with the day before yesterday. The freedom of the mind has triumphed over the unalterable law of the outer world.

But movies not only lose the spatial aspects of real theater; they also ignore its sense of time. Theater unfolds its story in the chronological order of reality. It can pause the continuous passage of time without compromising the rules of drama. There can be twenty years between the third and fourth acts because the playwright selects the important elements spread across space and time that contribute to the development of the story. However, they are bound by the basic rule of real time, which can only move forward and not backward. Whatever the theater shows us now must occur later in the story than what it previously showed. The strict classical requirement for total unity of time doesn't suit every drama, but a play would fail in its purpose if it revealed something in the third act that happened before the second act. Of course, there can be a play within a play, where the performers on the set may reenact events from ancient Roman history in front of the king of France. But this is a containment of the past within the present, which aligns perfectly with the actual order of events. Movies, on the other hand, do not need to adhere to this temporal structure of the physical universe. At any moment, a film can cut to the past. We examined this unique characteristic of film when we discussed the psychology of memory and imagination. With the full freedom of our imagination and the complete fluidity of our ideas, images of the past rush through the scenes of the present. Time is left behind. A man becomes a boy; today merges with the day before yesterday. The freedom of the mind has triumphed over the unchangeable laws of the outside world.

It is interesting to watch how playwrights nowadays try to steal the thunder of the photoplay and experiment with time reversals on the legitimate stage. We are esthetically on the borderland when a grandfather tells his grandchild the story of his own youth as a warning, and instead of the spoken words the events of his early years come before our eyes. This is, after all, quite similar to a play within a play. A very different experiment is tried in "Under Cover." The third act, which plays on the second floor of the house, ends with an explosion. The fourth act, which plays downstairs, begins a quarter of an hour before the explosion. Here we have a real denial of a fundamental condition of the theater. Or if we stick to recent products of the American stage, we may think of "On Trial," a play which perhaps comes nearest to a dramatic usurpation of the rights of the photoplay. We see the court scene and as one witness after another begins to give his testimony the courtroom is replaced by the scenes of the actions about which the witness is to report. Another clever play, "Between the Lines," ends the first act with a postman bringing three letters from the three children of the house. The second, third, and fourth acts lead us to the three different homes from which the letters came and the action in the three places not only precedes the writing of the letters; but goes on at the same time. The last act, finally, begins with the arrival of the letters which tell the ending of those events in the three homes. Such experiments are very suggestive but they are not any longer pure dramatic art. It is always possible to mix arts. An Italian painter produces very striking effects by putting pieces of glass and stone and rope into his paintings, but they are no longer pure paintings. The drama in which the later event comes before the earlier is an esthetic barbarism which is entertaining as a clever trick in a graceful superficial play, but intolerable in ambitious dramatic art. It is not only tolerable but perfectly natural in any photoplay. The pictorial reflection of the world is not bound by the rigid mechanism of time. Our mind is here and there, our mind turns to the present and then to the past: the photoplay can equal it in its freedom from the bondage of the material world.

It’s fascinating to see how playwrights today try to outshine films and experiment with time reversals onstage. We are aesthetically at a crossroads when a grandfather tells his grandchild about his own youth as a warning, and instead of just words, we see the events of his early years unfold before our eyes. This is quite similar to a play within a play. A very different approach is shown in "Under Cover." The third act, which takes place on the second floor of the house, ends with an explosion. The fourth act, which takes place downstairs, starts a quarter of an hour before the explosion. Here we have a real challenge to a fundamental rule of theater. If we look at recent productions on the American stage, we can consider "On Trial," a play that perhaps comes closest to dramatically taking over the rights of film. We see the court scene, and as each witness begins to testify, the courtroom is replaced by scenes of the actions they are reporting on. Another clever play, "Between the Lines," ends the first act with a postman delivering three letters from the three children in the house. The second, third, and fourth acts take us to the three different homes where the letters originated, and the action in those three places not only happens before the letters are written but continues simultaneously. Finally, the last act begins with the arrival of the letters that reveal the outcomes of those events in the three homes. Such experiments are very interesting, but they are no longer purely dramatic art. It’s always possible to blend artistic forms. An Italian painter creates striking effects by incorporating pieces of glass, stone, and rope into his paintings, but they no longer qualify as pure paintings. Drama that presents later events before earlier ones is an aesthetic barbarism that is entertaining as a clever trick in a light production, but unacceptable in serious dramatic art. It is not only acceptable but completely natural in any film. The visual representation of the world isn’t constrained by the rigid flow of time. Our minds can wander here and there, shifting from present to past; film can match this freedom from the constraints of the physical world.

But the theater is bound not only by space and time. Whatever it shows is controlled by the same laws of causality which govern nature. This involves a complete continuity of the physical events: no cause without following effect, no effect without preceding cause. This whole natural course is left behind in the play on the screen. The deviation from reality begins with that resolution of the continuous movement which we studied in our psychological discussions. We saw that the impression of movement results from an activity of the mind which binds the separate pictures together. What we actually see is a composite; it is like the movement of a fountain in which every jet is resolved into numberless drops. We feel the play of those drops in their sparkling haste as one continuous stream of water, and yet are conscious of the myriads of drops, each one separate from the others. This fountainlike spray of pictures has completely overcome the causal world.

But theater is limited not just by space and time. Everything it presents is governed by the same laws of causality that rule nature. This means a complete continuity of physical events: no cause without a following effect, and no effect without a preceding cause. This entire natural progression is left behind in the performance on screen. The deviation from reality begins with the breaking down of continuous movement that we discussed in our psychological studies. We noted that the sensation of movement comes from the mind's ability to connect separate images. What we actually perceive is a composite; it’s like the movement of a fountain where every spray is made up of countless droplets. We experience the flow of those droplets in their sparkling rush as one continuous stream of water, yet we are aware of the multitude of droplets, each distinct from the others. This fountain-like spray of images has completely transcended the causal world.

In an entirely different form this triumph over causality appears in the interruption of the events by pictures which belong to another series. We find this whenever the scene suddenly changes. The processes are not carried to their natural consequences. A movement is started, but before the cause brings its results another scene has taken its place. What this new scene brings may be an effect for which we saw no causes. But not only the processes are interrupted. The intertwining of the scenes which we have traced in detail is itself such a contrast to causality. It is as if different objects could fill the same space at the same time. It is as if the resistance of the material world had disappeared and the substances could penetrate one another. In the interlacing of our ideas we experience this superiority to all physical laws. The theater would not have even the technical means to give us such impressions, but if it had, it would have no right to make use of them, as it would destroy the basis on which the drama is built. We have only another case of the same type in those series of pictures which aim to force a suggestion on our mind. We have spoken of them. A certain effect is prepared by a chain of causes and yet when the causal result is to appear the film is cut off. We have the causes without the effect. The villain thrusts with his dagger—but a miracle has snatched away his victim.

In a completely different way, this victory over causality shows up when events are interrupted by images from another storyline. We see this whenever the scene suddenly switches. The actions aren't allowed to reach their natural conclusions. A movement begins, but before the cause can produce its results, another scene takes over. What this new scene introduces might be an effect for which we didn’t see any causes. But it’s not just the actions that are interrupted. The blending of the scenes we've examined in detail also contrasts with causality. It’s like different objects can occupy the same space simultaneously. It’s as if the resistance of the material world has vanished and the substances could pass through one another. In the intertwining of our thoughts, we experience this freedom from all physical laws. The theater wouldn’t even have the technical capabilities to give us such experiences, but even if it did, it wouldn’t be justified in using them, as it would undermine the foundation on which the drama stands. We have another example of this kind with those sequences of images that aim to impose a suggestion on our minds. We’ve talked about them. A specific effect is set up by a chain of causes, yet when the causal result is supposed to happen, the film cuts off. We see the causes without the effect. The villain lunges with his dagger—but a miracle has snatched away his victim.

While the moving pictures are lifted above the world of space and time and causality and are freed from its bounds, they are certainly not without law. We said before that the freedom with which the pictures replace one another is to a large degree comparable to the sparkling and streaming of the musical tones. The yielding to the play of the mental energies, to the attention and emotion, which is felt in the film pictures, is still more complete in the musical melodies and harmonies in which the tones themselves are merely the expressions of the ideas and feelings and will impulses of the mind. Their harmonies and disharmonies, their fusing and blending, is not controlled by any outer necessity, but by the inner agreement and disagreement of our free impulses. And yet in this world of musical freedom, everything is completely controlled by esthetic necessities. No sphere of practical life stands under such rigid rules as the realm of the composer. However bold the musical genius may be he cannot emancipate himself from the iron rule that his work must show complete unity in itself. All the separate prescriptions which the musical student has to learn are ultimately only the consequences of this central demand which music, the freest of the arts, shares with all the others. In the case of the film, too, the freedom from the physical forms of space, time, and causality does not mean any liberation from this esthetic bondage either. On the contrary, just as music is surrounded by more technical rules than literature, the photoplay must be held together by the esthetic demands still more firmly than is the drama. The arts which are subordinated to the conditions of space, time, and causality find a certain firmness of structure in these material forms which contain an element of outer connectedness. But where these forms are given up and where the freedom of mental play replaces their outer necessity, everything would fall asunder if the esthetic unity were disregarded.

While moving images exist beyond the limits of space, time, and cause and effect, they are certainly not lawless. We previously mentioned that the way images transition smoothly is quite similar to the sparkle and flow of musical notes. The surrender to the interplay of mental energies, attention, and emotions that we experience in film is even more profound in musical melodies and harmonies, where the notes are simply expressions of the mind's ideas, feelings, and desires. Their harmonies and disharmonies, their merging and blending, are not dictated by any external necessity but by the internal agreement and disagreement of our free impulses. Yet, in this realm of musical freedom, everything is completely governed by aesthetic necessities. No aspect of practical life adheres to such strict rules as the realm of the composer. No matter how daring the musical genius may be, they cannot escape the unyielding rule that their work must demonstrate complete unity. All the individual principles that music students must learn ultimately stem from this essential demand, which music, the freest of the arts, shares with all the others. Similarly, in film, freedom from the physical constraints of space, time, and causality does not equate to liberation from this aesthetic necessity either. In fact, just as music is surrounded by more technical rules than literature, film must adhere to aesthetic demands even more strictly than drama. The arts that are subject to the requirements of space, time, and causality find a certain structural firmness in these material forms that provide an element of external connectedness. However, when these forms are relinquished and the freedom of mental play takes their place, everything would fall apart if aesthetic unity were ignored.

This unity is, first of all, the unity of action. The demand for it is the same which we know from the drama. The temptation to neglect it is nowhere greater than in the photoplay where outside matter can so easily be introduced or independent interests developed. It is certainly true for the photoplay, as for every work of art, that nothing has the right to existence in its midst which is not internally needed for the unfolding of the unified action. Wherever two plots are given to us, we receive less by far than if we had only one plot. We leave the sphere of valuable art entirely when a unified action is ruined by mixing it with declamation, and propaganda which is not organically interwoven with the action itself. It may be still fresh in memory what an esthetically intolerable helter-skelter performance was offered to the public in "The Battlecry of Peace." Nothing can be more injurious to the esthetic cultivation of the people than such performances which hold the attention of the spectators by ambitious detail and yet destroy their esthetic sensibility by a complete disregard of the fundamental principle of art, the demand for unity. But we recognized also that this unity involves complete isolation. We annihilate beauty when we link the artistic creation with practical interests and transform the spectator into a selfishly interested bystander. The scenic background of the play is not presented in order that we decide whether we want to spend our next vacation there. The interior decoration of the rooms is not exhibited as a display for a department store. The men and women who carry out the action of the plot must not be people whom we may meet tomorrow on the street. All the threads of the play must be knotted together in the play itself and none should be connected with our outside interests. A good photoplay must be isolated and complete in itself like a beautiful melody. It is not an advertisement for the newest fashions.

This unity is, first of all, the unity of action. The demand for it is the same as in drama. The urge to overlook it is nowhere stronger than in film, where outside elements can be easily introduced or separate interests developed. It is definitely true for film, as with every piece of art, that nothing has a right to exist within it that isn’t necessary for the unfolding of the unified action. Whenever two plots are given to us, we get far less than if we had just one plot. We completely step outside the realm of valuable art when a unified action is destroyed by mixing it with speeches and propaganda that aren’t organically tied to the action itself. It might still be fresh in our minds how esthetically intolerable the chaotic performance of "The Battlecry of Peace" was for the audience. Nothing is more harmful to the aesthetic development of the people than such performances that grab the audience's attention with ambitious details yet destroy their aesthetic sensitivity by completely ignoring the fundamental principle of art: the demand for unity. But we also recognized that this unity requires total isolation. We destroy beauty when we connect artistic creation with practical interests and turn the viewer into a selfishly interested bystander. The scenic background of the film isn’t shown so we can decide if we want to spend our next vacation there. The interior decoration of the rooms isn’t displayed as a showcase for a department store. The characters who perform the action shouldn’t be people we might encounter on the street tomorrow. All the elements of the film must be tied together within the film itself, and none should be linked to our outside interests. A good film must be isolated and complete in itself, like a beautiful melody. It is not an advertisement for the latest fashions.

This unity of action involves unity of characters. It has too often been maintained by those who theorize on the photoplay that the development of character is the special task of the drama, while the photoplay, which lacks words, must be satisfied with types. Probably this is only a reflection of the crude state which most photoplays of today have not outgrown. Internally, there is no reason why the means of the photoplay should not allow a rather subtle depicting of complex character. But the chief demand is that the characters remain consistent, that the action be developed according to inner necessity and that the characters themselves be in harmony with the central idea of the plot. However, as soon as we insist on unity we have no right to think only of the action which gives the content of the play. We cannot make light of the form. As in music the melody and rhythms belong together, as in painting not every color combination suits every subject, and as in poetry not every stanza would agree with every idea, so the photoplay must bring action and pictorial expression into perfect harmony. But this demand repeats itself in every single picture. We take it for granted that the painter balances perfectly the forms in his painting, groups them so that an internal symmetry can be felt and that the lines and curves and colors blend into a unity. Every single picture of the sixteen thousand which are shown to us in one reel ought to be treated with this respect of the pictorial artist for the unity of the forms.

This unity of action involves unity of characters. It's often argued by those who analyze film that character development is the main job of drama, while film, which lacks dialogue, must settle for archetypes. This idea probably reflects the basic stage that most films today have not moved beyond. Internally, there’s no reason why the tools of film can’t effectively show complex characters. However, the key requirement is that the characters stay consistent, that the action unfolds logically, and that the characters align with the central theme of the story. When we focus on unity, we can't just consider the action that carries the story. We also need to respect the form. Just as in music the melody and rhythms work together, in painting not every color combination fits every subject, and in poetry not every stanza aligns with every idea, so in film, action and visual representation must come together seamlessly. This requirement is evident in every single shot. We expect the artist to perfectly balance the forms in their artwork, arranging them so that an inner symmetry is felt and that lines, curves, and colors merge into a cohesive whole. Every single shot out of the sixteen thousand presented in a single reel should be treated with the same regard for visual unity as an artist would.

The photoplay shows us a significant conflict of human actions in moving pictures which, freed from the physical forms of space, time, and causality, are adjusted to the free play of our mental experiences and which reach complete isolation from the practical world through the perfect unity of plot and pictorial appearance.

The movie presents a meaningful conflict of human actions through moving images that, liberated from the constraints of space, time, and cause and effect, are tailored to freely engage our mental experiences. It achieves complete separation from the real world by perfectly uniting the story and visual presentation.


CHAPTER X

THE DEMANDS OF THE PHOTOPLAY

We have found the general formula for the new art of the photoplay. We may turn our attention to some consequences which are involved in this general principle and to some esthetic demands which result from it. Naturally the greatest of all of them is the one for which no specific prescription can be given, namely the imaginative talent of the scenario writer and the producer. The new art is in that respect not different from all the old arts. A Beethoven writes immortal symphonies; a thousand conductors are writing symphonies after the same pattern and after the same technical rules and yet not one survives the next day. What the great painter or sculptor, composer or poet, novelist or dramatist, gives from the depth of his artistic personality is interesting and significant; and the unity of form and content is natural and perfect. What untalented amateurs produce is trivial and flat; the relation of form and content is forced; the unity of the whole is incomplete. Between these two extremes any possible degree of approach to the ideal is shown in the history of human arts. It cannot be otherwise with the art of the film. Even the clearest recognition of the specific demands of the photoplay cannot be sufficient to replace original talent or genius. The most slavish obedience to esthetic demands cannot make a tiresome plot interesting and a trivial action significant.

We have discovered the general formula for the new art of film. We can now focus on some implications related to this principle and the artistic requirements that come from it. The most important of these is the one that can’t be specifically defined, which is the creative talent of the screenwriter and the producer. In this regard, the new art is no different from the traditional arts. A Beethoven composed timeless symphonies; a thousand conductors replicate symphonies following the same pattern and technical guidelines, but not one of them lasts beyond the next day. What the great painter, sculptor, composer, poet, novelist, or playwright expresses from the depth of their artistic soul is compelling and meaningful; and the harmony of form and content is natural and flawless. What untalented amateurs create is shallow and dull; the connection between form and content feels forced; the overall unity is incomplete. Between these two extremes, various degrees of closeness to the ideal are evident in the history of human arts. The film art is no exception. Even a clear understanding of the specific demands of filmmaking cannot replace original talent or genius. Following aesthetic requirements to the letter cannot turn a boring story into something engaging or make a trivial action meaningful.

If there is anything which introduces a characteristic element into the creation of the photoplay as against all other arts, it may be found in the undeniable fact that the photoplay always demands the coöperation of two inventive personalities, the scenario writer and the producer. Some collaboration exists in other arts too. The opera demands the poet and the composer; and yet the text of the opera is a work of literature independent and complete in itself, and the music of the opera has its own life. Again, every musical work demands the performer. The orchestra must play the symphonies, the pianist or the singer must make the melodies living, the actors must play the drama. But the music is a perfect work of art even before it is sung or played on an instrument, just as a drama is complete as a work of literature even if it never reaches the stage. Moreover it is evident that the realization by actors is needed for the photoplay too. But we may disregard that. What we have in mind is that the work which the scenario writer creates is in itself still entirely imperfect and becomes a complete work of art only through the action of the producer. He plays a rôle entirely different from that of the mere stage manager in the drama. The stage manager carries out what the writer of the drama prescribes, however much his own skill and visual imagination and insight into the demands of the characters may add to the embodiment of the dramatic action. But the producer of the photoplay really must show himself a creative artist, inasmuch as he is the one who actually transforms the plays into pictures. The emphasis in the drama lies on the spoken word, to which the stage manager does not add anything. It is all contained in the lines. In the photoplay the whole emphasis lies on the picture and its composition is left entirely to the producing artist.

If there’s one thing that sets the photoplay apart from all other art forms, it’s the undeniable fact that it always requires the cooperation of two creative individuals: the screenwriter and the producer. There’s some collaboration in other arts as well. Opera needs both the poet and the composer, but the libretto stands as a complete literary work on its own, just as the music of the opera has its own separate identity. Similarly, every musical piece needs a performer. The orchestra must play the symphonies, the pianist or the singer has to bring the melodies to life, and the actors must perform the drama. However, music is a complete work of art even before it’s sung or played, just as a drama exists as a complete piece of literature even if it never makes it to the stage. Of course, actors are necessary for the photoplay too, but that’s beside the point. What’s important is that the screenplay created by the screenwriter is still completely unfinished and only becomes a complete work of art through the work of the producer. The producer's role is quite different from that of a mere stage manager in a drama. The stage manager executes the playwright's vision, no matter how much their own talent and imagination contribute to the performance. However, the producer of a photoplay must truly be a creative artist because they are the ones who turn the screenplays into visual stories. In drama, the focus is on the spoken word, and the stage manager doesn’t add to that; everything is contained in the script. In the photoplay, the entire focus is on the imagery, and its composition is completely left to the producing artist.

But the scenario writer must not only have talent for dramatic invention and construction; he must be wide awake to the uniqueness of his task, that is, he must feel at every moment that he is writing for the screen and not for the stage or for a book. And this brings us back to our central argument. He must understand that the photoplay is not a photographed drama, but that it is controlled by psychological conditions of its own. As soon as it is grasped that the film play is not simply a mechanical reproduction of another art but is an art of a special kind, it follows that talents of a special kind must be devoted to it and that nobody ought to feel it beneath his artistic dignity to write scenarios in the service of this new art. No doubt the moving picture performances today still stand on a low artistic level. Nine tenths of the plays are cheap melodramas or vulgar farces. The question is not how much larger a percentage of really valuable dramas can be found in our theaters. Many of their plays are just as much an appeal to the lowest instincts. But at least the theater is not forced to be satisfied with such degrading comedies and pseudotragedies. The world literature of the stage contains an abundance of works of eternal value. It is a purely social and not an esthetic question, why the theaters around the "White Way" yield to the vulgar taste instead of using the truly beautiful drama for the raising of the public mind. The moving picture theaters face an entirely different situation. Their managers may have the best intentions to give better plays; and yet they are unable to do so because the scenario literature has so far nothing which can be compared with the master works of the drama; and nothing of this higher type can be expected or hoped for until the creation of photoplays is recognized as worthy of the highest ideal endeavor.

But the screenwriter must not only have a talent for creating dramatic stories; they need to be fully aware of the uniqueness of their job, meaning they have to understand that they are writing for film and not for the stage or a book. This brings us back to our main point. They must realize that a film is not just a filmed play, but is influenced by its own psychological factors. Once it's understood that a film script is not merely a mechanical reproduction of another art form but is its own unique art, it becomes clear that specific talents need to be dedicated to it, and no one should feel that it's beneath their artistic dignity to write scripts for this new art form. No doubt, the performances in moving pictures today still operate at a low artistic level. Nine out of ten of these films are cheap melodramas or crude comedies. The issue isn't about finding a larger percentage of truly valuable dramas in our theaters. Many of those plays are just as much an appeal to the lowest instincts. However, at least the theater isn't forced to settle for such degrading comedies and fake tragedies. The world literature of the stage has plenty of timeless works. It's purely a social and not an aesthetic issue why the theaters along the "White Way" give in to low tastes instead of promoting truly great drama to elevate the public mindset. The situation for movie theaters is completely different. Their managers might have the best intentions to present better films; and yet, they find it difficult because the scriptwriting currently lacks works that can compare with the masterpieces of theater, and nothing of this higher caliber can be anticipated or achieved until the creation of film scripts is recognized as a worthy pursuit of the highest ideal.

Nobody denies that the photoplay shares the characteristic features of the drama. Both depend upon the conflict of interests and of acts. These conflicts, tragic or comic, demand a similar development and solution on the stage and on the screen. A mere showing of human activity without will conflict might give very pleasant moving pictures of idyllic or romantic character or perhaps of practical interest. The result would be a kind of lyric or epic poem on the screen, or a travelogue or what not, but it would never shape itself into a photoplay as long as that conflict of human interests which the drama demands was lacking. Yet, as this conflict of will is expressed in the one case by living speaking men, in the other by moving pictures, the difference in the artistic conception must surely be as great as the similarity. Hence one of the supreme demands must be for an original literature of real power and significance, in which every thought is generated by the idea of the screen. As long as the photoplays are fed by the literature of the stage, the new art can never come to its own and can never reach its real goal. It is surely no fault of Shakespeare that Hamlet and King Lear are very poor photoplays. If ever a Shakespeare arises for the screen, his work would be equally unsatisfactory if it were dragged to the stage. Peer Gynt is no longer Ibsen's if the actors are dumb.

Nobody argues that movies share key traits with theater. Both rely on conflicts of interests and actions. These conflicts, whether tragic or comedic, require similar development and resolution on stage and on screen. Simply displaying human activity without a conflict of will might create nice moving images that are idyllic or romantic, or maybe of practical interest. The result would be like a lyrical or epic poem on screen, or a travel show or something similar, but it would never turn into a movie as long as that conflict of human interests, which drama demands, is absent. Yet, since this conflict of will is portrayed differently—with living, speaking people in one case and moving pictures in the other—the difference in artistic conception is just as significant as the similarity. Therefore, one of the main requirements must be for original literature with true power and meaning, where every idea is created from the concept of the screen. As long as movies draw from stage literature, this new art form can never truly flourish or achieve its real purpose. It's certainly not Shakespeare's fault that Hamlet and King Lear make for poor films. If a Shakespeare for the screen ever emerges, his work would be equally inadequate if forced onto the stage. Peer Gynt is no longer Ibsen's if the actors can't speak.

The novel, in certain respects, fares still worse, but in other respects some degrees better. It is true that in the superficial literature written for the hour the demarcation line between dramatic and narrative works is often ignored. The best sellers of the novel counter are often warmed over into successful theater plays, and no society play with a long run on Broadway escapes its transformation into a serial novel for the newspapers. But where literature is at its height, the deep difference can be felt distinctly. The epic art, including the novel, traces the experiences and the development of a character, while the drama is dependent upon the conflict of character. Mere adventures of a personality are never sufficient for a good drama and are not less unsatisfactory for the plot of a photoplay. In the novel the opposing characters are only a part of the social background which is needed to show the life story of the hero or heroine. They have not the independent significance which is essential for the dramatic conflict. The novel on the screen, if it is a true novel and not the novelistic rendering of what is really a dramatic plot, must be lifeless and uninspiring. But on the other hand the photoplay much more than the drama emphasizes the background of human action, and it shares this trait with the novel. Both the social and the natural backgrounds are the real setting for the development of the chief character in the story. These features can easily be transferred to the photoplay and for this reason some picturized novels have had the advantage over the photoplay cut from the drama. The only true conclusion must remain, however, that neither drama nor novel is sufficient for the film scenarios. The photopoet must turn to life itself and must remodel life in the artistic forms which are characteristic of his particular art. If he has truly grasped the fundamental meaning of the screen world, his imagination will guide him more safely than his reminiscences of dramas which he has seen on the stage and of novels which he has read.

The novel, in some ways, is in worse shape, but in other ways, it’s a bit better. It’s true that in the light literature written for the moment, the line between dramatic and narrative works is often blurred. Bestsellers often get turned into successful theater plays, and no long-running Broadway play avoids becoming a serialized novel for the newspapers. But where literature is at its best, the big difference is clearly felt. Epic art, including the novel, tells the stories and development of a character, while drama relies on character conflict. Simply following a character's adventures is never enough for a good drama and doesn’t work well for a film plot either. In a novel, the opposing characters are just part of the social background that illustrates the life story of the hero or heroine. They lack the independent significance that is essential for dramatic conflict. A novel adapted for the screen, if it’s a genuine novel and not just a dramatized version of a dramatic plot, will end up feeling lifeless and uninspired. However, the film definitely emphasizes the background of human action more than drama does, and it shares this characteristic with the novel. Both social and natural backgrounds serve as the real setting for the main character's development in the story. These elements can easily be transferred to film, which is why some adapted novels have an advantage over films taken directly from dramas. The bottom line, though, is that neither drama nor novel is enough for film scripts. The screenwriter must draw from real life and reshape it into the artistic forms that suit his particular craft. If he truly understands the essence of the cinematic world, his imagination will lead him better than memories of the dramas he has watched or the novels he has read.

If we turn to a few special demands which are contained in such a general postulate for a new artistic method, we naturally think at once of the rôle of words. The drama and novel live by words. How much of this noblest vehicle of thought can the photoplay conserve in its domain? We all know what a large part of the photoplay today is told us by the medium of words and phrases. How little would we know what those people are talking about if we saw them only acting and had not beforehand the information which the "leader" supplies. The technique differs with different companies. Some experiment with projecting the spoken words into the picture itself, bringing the phrase in glaring white letters near the head of the person who is speaking, in a way similar to the methods of the newspaper cartoonists. But mostly the series of the pictures is interrupted and the decisive word taken directly from the lips of the hero, or an explanatory statement which gives meaning to the whole is thrown on the screen. Sometimes this may be a concession to the mentally less trained members of the audience, but usually these printed comments are indispensable for understanding the plot, and even the most intelligent spectator would feel helpless without these frequent guideposts. But this habit of the picture houses today is certainly not an esthetic argument. They are obliged to yield to the scheme simply because the scenario writers are still untrained and clumsy in using the technique of the new art.

If we look at a few specific demands that are part of a general call for a new artistic method, we immediately consider the role of words. The plays and novels thrive on words. How much of this greatest form of expression can film preserve in its territory? We all know that a large portion of films today is conveyed to us through words and phrases. How little would we understand what those characters are saying if we only watched them act and hadn’t received the information that the "leader" provides beforehand? The technique varies between different companies. Some try projecting the spoken words directly onto the screen, showing the phrases in bright white letters near the person speaking, similar to how newspaper cartoonists work. But mostly, the sequence of images is interrupted, and crucial words are taken straight from the lips of the main character, or an explanatory statement that clarifies the whole story is displayed on the screen. Sometimes this is a nod to the less intellectually engaged audience members, but usually, these printed comments are essential for grasping the plot, and even the sharpest viewer would feel confused without these frequent signposts. However, this trend in movie theaters today is certainly not an artistic justification. They have to resort to this approach simply because screenplay writers are still untrained and clumsy in utilizing the techniques of this new art.

Some religious painters of medieval times put in the picture itself phrases which the persons were supposed to speak, as if the words were leaving their mouths. But we could not imagine Raphael and Michelangelo making use of a method of communication which is so entirely foreign to the real spirit of painting. Every art grows slowly to the point where the artist relies on its characteristic and genuine forms of expression. Elements which do not belong to it are at first mingled in it and must be slowly eliminated. The photoplay of the day after tomorrow will surely be freed from all elements which are not really pictures. The beginning of the photoplay as a mere imitation of the theater is nowhere so evident as in this inorganic combination with bits of dialogue or explanatory phrases. The art of words and the art of pictures are there forcibly yoked together. Whoever writes his scenarios so that the pictures cannot be understood without these linguistic crutches is an esthetic failure in the new art. The next step toward the emancipation of the photoplay decidedly must be the creation of plays which speak the language of pictures only.

Some religious painters from medieval times included phrases in their artwork that the figures were meant to say, as if the words were coming directly from their mouths. However, we can’t picture Raphael and Michelangelo using such a method of communication that feels so disconnected from the true essence of painting. Every art form gradually evolves to the point where the artist relies on its own unique and authentic expressions. Elements that don’t belong initially mix in but need to be slowly removed. The future of film will definitely move away from any aspects that aren’t genuinely visual. The early stages of film, merely mimicking theater, are most apparent in this awkward blend of dialogue or explanatory text. The art of words and the art of images are forced together there. Anyone who writes their scripts in a way that the visuals can’t be understood without these verbal supports is failing artistically in this new medium. The next step towards freeing film must be the development of plays that communicate solely through the language of images.

Two apparent exceptions seem justified. It is not contrary to the internal demands of the film art if a complete scene has a title. A leader like "The Next Morning" or "After Three Years" or "In South Africa" or "The First Step" or "The Awakening" or "Among Friends" has the same character as the title of a painting in a picture gallery. If we read in our catalogue of paintings that a picture is called "Landscape" or "Portrait" we feel the words to be superfluous. If we read that its title is "London Bridge in Mist" or "Portrait of the Pope" we receive a valuable suggestion which is surely not without influence on our appreciation of the picture, and yet it is not an organic part of the painting itself. In this sense a leader as title for a scene or still better for a whole reel may be applied without any esthetic objection. The other case which is not only possible but perfectly justified is the introduction of letters, telegrams, posters, newspaper clippings, and similar printed or written communications in a pictorial close-up the enlargement of which makes every word readable. This scheme is more and more introduced into the plays today and the movement is in a proper direction. The words of the telegram or of the signboard and even of the cutting from the newspaper are parts of the reality which the pictures are to show us and their meaning does not stand outside but within the pictorial story. The true artist will make sparing use of this method in order that the spectator may not change his attitude. He must remain in an inner adjustment to pictorial forms and must not switch over into an adaptation to sentences. But if its use is not exaggerated, the method is legitimate, in striking contrast to the inartistic use of the same words as leaders between the pictures.

Two clear exceptions seem reasonable. It's not against the principles of film as an art form for a complete scene to have a title. A label like "The Next Morning," "After Three Years," "In South Africa," "The First Step," "The Awakening," or "Among Friends" has the same feel as a title of a painting in an art gallery. When we see in a painting catalog that a piece is titled "Landscape" or "Portrait," we find those words unnecessary. But when we read that a work is called "London Bridge in Mist" or "Portrait of the Pope," it offers a helpful hint that likely affects our appreciation of the artwork, even though it's not an integral part of the painting itself. In this way, a title for a scene—or, even better, for an entire reel—can be used without any aesthetic problems. The other scenario, which is not only possible but completely valid, is the inclusion of letters, telegrams, posters, newspaper clippings, and other printed or written communications in a close-up shot where every word is clearly readable. This method is increasingly being used in contemporary plays, and it’s heading in a positive direction. The words on the telegram or sign and even the text from a newspaper clipping are parts of the reality that the visuals are meant to convey, and their meaning is embedded within the visual narrative. A true artist will use this technique sparingly so that the viewer doesn't shift their focus. The audience must stay connected to the visual elements and not shift into a focus on text. However, if this approach is not overdone, it is entirely appropriate, which is a stark contrast to the unartistic way of using the same words as titles between images.

The condemnation of guiding words, in the interest of the purity of the picture play as such, also leads to earnest objection to phonographic accompaniments. Those who, like Edison, had a technical, scientific, and social interest but not a genuine esthetic point of view in the development of the moving pictures naturally asked themselves whether this optical imitation of the drama might not be improved by an acoustical imitation too. Then the idea would be to connect the kinematoscope with the phonograph and to synchronize them so completely that with every visible movement of the lips the audible sound of the words would leave the diaphragm of the apparatus. All who devoted themselves to this problem had considerable difficulties and when their ventures proved practical failures with the theater audiences, they were inclined to blame their inability to solve the technical problem perfectly. They were not aware that the real difficulty was an esthetic and internal one. Even if the voices were heard with ideal perfection and exactly in time with the movements on the screen, the effect on an esthetically conscientious audience would have been disappointing. A photoplay cannot gain but only lose if its visual purity is destroyed. If we see and hear at the same time, we do indeed come nearer to the real theater, but this is desirable only if it is our goal to imitate the stage. Yet if that were the goal, even the best imitation would remain far inferior to an actual theater performance. As soon as we have clearly understood that the photoplay is an art in itself, the conservation of the spoken word is as disturbing as color would be on the clothing of a marble statue.

The criticism of using spoken dialogue, aimed at maintaining the purity of film as an art form, also leads to a strong opposition to soundtracks. People like Edison, who had a technical, scientific, and social interest but not a genuine artistic perspective in the evolution of film, wondered if this visual representation of drama could also be enhanced with sound. The idea was to connect the projector with a phonograph and sync them so well that with every visible lip movement, the sound of the words would come from the device. Those who took on this challenge faced significant difficulties, and when their attempts failed to resonate with theatergoers, they often blamed their inability to perfect the technology. They didn’t realize that the real challenge was more about artistic sensibility. Even if the voices were perfectly clear and timed perfectly with the visuals, it would still disappoint an audience that values aesthetics. A film loses its impact if its visual purity is compromised. If we see and hear simultaneously, we might get closer to a live theater experience, but that’s only a good thing if our aim is to replicate the stage. However, even the best reproduction would still fall short of an actual theater performance. Once we truly understand that film is its own art form, preserving the spoken word becomes as jarring as adding color to the clothing of a marble statue.

It is quite different with accompanying music. Even if the music in the overwhelming majority of cases were not so pitifully bad as it is in most of the picture theaters of today, no one would consider it an organic part of the photoplay itself, like the singing in the opera. Yet the need of such a more or less melodious and even more or less harmonious accompaniment has always been felt, and even the poorest substitute for decent music has been tolerated, as seeing long reels in a darkened house without any tonal accompaniment fatigues and ultimately irritates an average audience. The music relieves the tension and keeps the attention awake. It must be entirely subordinated and it is a fact that most people are hardly aware of the special pieces which are played, while they would feel uncomfortable without them. But it is not at all necessary for the music to be limited to such harmonious smoothing of the mind by rhythmical tones. The music can and ought to be adjusted to the play on the screen. The more ambitious picture corporations have clearly recognized this demand and show their new plays with exact suggestions for the choice of musical pieces to be played as accompaniment. The music does not tell a part of the plot and does not replace the picture as words would do, but simply reënforces the emotional setting. It is quite probable, when the photoplay art has found its esthetic recognition, that composers will begin to write the musical score for a beautiful photoplay with the same enthusiasm with which they write in other musical forms.

It's a different story when it comes to accompanying music. Even if the music in most cases wasn’t as painfully bad as it is in many movie theaters today, no one would consider it an essential part of the film, like singing in an opera. Still, there’s always been a need for some kind of melodic and somewhat harmonious background, and even the worst substitutes for decent music have been tolerated because watching long films in a dark theater without any sound can tire and eventually irritate the average viewer. The music eases the tension and keeps attention engaged. It must play a supporting role, and most people hardly notice the specific pieces being played, yet they would feel uneasy without it. However, it’s not necessary for the music to just provide a soothing background with rhythmic sounds. It can and should be tailored to match the action on screen. The more forward-thinking film companies have acknowledged this need and present their new films with specific suggestions for the musical pieces to be used as accompaniment. The music does not convey part of the story or replace the visuals as dialogue would, but simply enhances the emotional atmosphere. It's likely that once the art of film has gained its proper aesthetic recognition, composers will start writing musical scores for films with the same passion they apply to other music genres.

Just between the intolerable accompaniment by printed or spoken words on the one side and the perfectly welcome rendering of emotionally fitting music on the other, we find the noises with which the photoplay managers like to accompany their performances. When the horses gallop, we must hear the hoofbeats, if rain or hail is falling, if the lightning flashes, we hear the splashing or the thunderstorm. We hear the firing of a gun, the whistling of a locomotive, ships' bells, or the ambulance gong, or the barking dog, or the noise when Charlie Chaplin falls downstairs. They even have a complicated machine, the "allefex," which can produce over fifty distinctive noises, fit for any photoplay emergency. It will probably take longer to rid the photoplay of these appeals to the imagination than the explanations of the leaders, but ultimately they will have to disappear too. They have no right to existence in a work of art which is composed of pictures. In so far as they are simply heightening the emotional tension, they may enter into the music itself, but in so far as they tell a part of the story, they ought to be ruled out as intrusions from another sphere. We might just as well improve the painting of a rose garden by bathing it in rose perfume in order that the spectators might get the odor of the roses together with the sight of them. The limitations of an art are in reality its strength and to overstep its boundaries means to weaken it.

Just between the annoying noise of printed or spoken words on one side and the perfectly fitting emotional music on the other, we have the sound effects that movie producers love to add to their films. When the horses run, we have to hear the hoofbeats; if it’s raining or hailing, when the lightning strikes, we hear the splashing or the thunderstorm. We hear gunshots, the whistle of a train, ship bells, ambulance sirens, barking dogs, or the sound of Charlie Chaplin falling down the stairs. They even have a complex machine, the "allefex," that can create over fifty different sounds for any movie situation. It will likely take longer to get rid of these sounds that appeal to the imagination than to explain them away, but eventually, they will have to go too. They don’t belong in a work of art that is made up of images. While they may enhance the emotional impact, they should blend into the music itself; however, when they try to tell part of the story, they should be considered distractions from another realm. We might as well enhance a painting of a rose garden by surrounding it with rose perfume so that viewers can smell the roses along with seeing them. The limitations of an art form are actually its strength, and crossing those boundaries only weakens it.

It may be more open to discussion whether this same negative attitude ought to be taken toward color in the photoplay. It is well-known what wonderful technical progress has been secured by those who wanted to catch the color hues and tints of nature in their moving pictures. To be sure, many of the prettiest effects in color are even today produced by artificial stencil methods. Photographs are simply printed in three colors like any ordinary color print. The task of cutting those many stencils for the thousands of pictures on a reel is tremendous, and yet these difficulties have been overcome. Any desired color effect can be obtained by this method and the beauty of the best specimens is unsurpassed. But the difficulty is so great that it can hardly become a popular method. The direct photographing of the colors themselves will be much simpler as soon as the method is completely perfected. It can hardly be said that this ideal has been reached today. The successive photographing through three red, green, and violet screens and the later projection of the pictures through screens of these colors seemed scientifically the best approach. Yet it needed a multiplication of pictures per second which offered extreme difficulty, besides an extraordinary increase of expense. The practical advance seems more secure along the line of the so-called "kinemacolor." Its effects are secured by the use of two screens only, not quite satisfactory, as true blue impressions have to suffer and the reddish and greenish ones are emphasized. Moreover the eye is sometimes disturbed by big flashes of red or green light. Yet the beginnings are so excellent that the perfect solution of the technical problem may be expected in the near future. Would it be at the same time a solution of the esthetic problem?

It might be more debatable whether we should have the same negative attitude toward color in movies. It’s well-known how much amazing technical progress has been achieved by those aiming to capture the colors and shades of nature in their films. Many of the most beautiful color effects are still created using artificial stencil methods today. Photographs are simply printed in three colors, just like any regular color print. The task of cutting all those stencils for the thousands of frames on a reel is enormous, yet these challenges have been overcome. Any desired color effect can be achieved through this method, and the beauty of the best examples is unmatched. However, the difficulty is so great that it’s unlikely to become a popular method. Directly photographing the colors themselves will be much simpler once the technique is fully perfected. It’s safe to say that we haven’t reached that ideal yet. The approach of sequentially photographing through three red, green, and violet screens and then projecting the images through these color screens seemed to be the most scientifically sound method. Yet, it required a huge increase in the number of pictures per second, which posed significant challenges and led to excessive costs. Practical advancements appear to be more likely with the so-called “kinemacolor.” This method uses only two screens, which isn’t completely satisfactory since true blue impressions are compromised while reddish and greenish ones are highlighted. Additionally, the eye can sometimes be bothered by sudden flashes of red or green light. However, the initial results are so promising that we can expect a perfect solution to this technical issue in the near future. But will it also resolve the aesthetic challenge?

It has been claimed by friends of color photography that at the present stage of development natural color photography is unsatisfactory for a rendering of outer events because any scientific or historical happening which is reproduced demands exactly the same colors which reality shows. But on the other hand the process seems perfectly sufficient for the photoplay because there no objective colors are expected and it makes no difference whether the gowns of the women or the rugs on the floor show the red and green too vividly and the blue too faintly. From an esthetic point of view we ought to come to exactly the opposite verdict. For the historical events even the present technical methods are on the whole satisfactory. The famous British coronation pictures were superb and they gained immensely by the rich color effects. They gave much more than a mere photograph in black and white, and the splendor and glory of those radiant colors suffered little from the suppression of the bluish tones. They were not shown in order to match the colors in a ribbon store. For the news pictures of the day the "kinemacolor" and similar schemes are excellent. But when we come to photoplays the question is no longer one of technique; first of all we stand before the problem: how far does the coloring subordinate itself to the aim of the photoplay? No doubt the effect of the individual picture would be heightened by the beauty of the colors. But would it heighten the beauty of the photoplay? Would not this color be again an addition which oversteps the essential limits of this particular art? We do not want to paint the cheeks of the Venus of Milo: neither do we want to see the coloring of Mary Pickford or Anita Stewart. We became aware that the unique task of the photoplay art can be fulfilled only by a far-reaching disregard of reality. The real human persons and the real landscapes must be left behind and, as we saw, must be transformed into pictorial suggestions only. We must be strongly conscious of their pictorial unreality in order that that wonderful play of our inner experiences may be realized on the screen. This consciousness of unreality must seriously suffer from the addition of color. We are once more brought too near to the world which really surrounds us with the richness of its colors, and the more we approach it the less we gain that inner freedom, that victory of the mind over nature, which remains the ideal of the photoplay. The colors are almost as detrimental as the voices.

It has been argued by advocates of color photography that at this point in its development, natural color photography falls short for capturing real-world events, as any scientific or historical event that’s reproduced requires the exact colors that exist in reality. However, it seems perfectly fine for movies, where no specific colors are expected, and it doesn't matter if the dresses of the actresses or the carpets on the floor appear too bright in red and green and too faint in blue. Aesthetically, we should reach exactly the opposite conclusion. For historical events, even the current techniques are generally satisfactory. The well-known British coronation photos were stunning and greatly benefited from the rich color effects. They offered much more than just a black-and-white photograph, and the grandeur and brilliance of those vibrant colors were hardly affected by the lack of blue tones. They were not meant to match the colors in a fabric store. For the current news photos, the "kinemacolor" and similar techniques work very well. But when it comes to films, the issue is no longer just about technique; we first face the question: how much does color serve the purpose of the film? No doubt, the effect of each frame would be enhanced by the beauty of the colors. But would it enhance the overall beauty of the movie? Wouldn’t this color be an addition that crosses the fundamental boundaries of this art? We don't want to paint the cheeks of the Venus de Milo; we also don't want to see the skin tone of Mary Pickford or Anita Stewart. We come to realize that the unique goal of film art can only be achieved by largely ignoring reality. The real people and authentic landscapes must be set aside and must, as we have seen, be transformed into visual suggestions only. We must be acutely aware of their visual unreality so that the incredible interplay of our inner feelings can manifest on screen. This awareness of unreality must be seriously compromised by the introduction of color. We are once again brought too close to the real world around us, with its vibrant colors, and the closer we get to it, the less inner freedom we achieve, that triumph of the mind over nature, which remains the ideal of film. The colors are almost as harmful as the voices.

On the other hand the producer must be careful to keep sufficiently in contact with reality, as otherwise the emotional interests upon which the whole play depends would be destroyed. We must not take the people to be real, but we must link with them all the feelings and associations which we would connect with real men. This is possible only if in their flat, colorless, pictorial setting they share the real features of men. For this reason it is important to suggest to the spectator the impression of natural size. The demand of the imagination for the normal size of the persons and things in the picture is so strong that it easily and constantly overcomes great enlargements or reductions. We see at first a man in his normal size and then by a close-up an excessive enlargement of his head. Yet we do not feel it as if the person himself were enlarged. By a characteristic psychical substitution we feel rather that we have come nearer to him and that the size of the visual image was increased by the decreasing of the distance. If the whole picture is so much enlarged that the persons are continually given much above normal size, by a psychical inhibition we deceive ourselves about the distance and believe that we are much nearer to the screen than we actually are. Thus we instinctively remain under the impression of normal appearances. But this spell can easily be broken and the esthetic effect is then greatly diminished. In the large picture houses in which the projecting camera is often very far from the screen, the dimensions of the persons in the pictures may be three or four times larger than human beings. The illusion is nevertheless perfect, because the spectator misjudges the distances as long as he does not see anything in the neighborhood of the screen. But if the eye falls upon a woman playing the piano directly below the picture, the illusion is destroyed. He sees on the screen enormous giants whose hands are as large as half the piano player, and the normal reactions which are the spring for the enjoyment of the play are suppressed.

On the other hand, the producer must be careful to stay in touch with reality, or else the emotional connections that the whole play relies on could be lost. We shouldn't mistake these characters for real people, but we need to connect them with the feelings and associations we would have with real individuals. This is only possible if, within their flat and colorless visual setting, they share the true traits of humans. For this reason, it’s important to give the audience the impression of natural size. The imagination strongly demands that people and objects in the scene are of normal size, easily overcoming significant enlargements or reductions. At first, we see a man at his normal size, and then with a close-up, his head appears excessively large. However, it doesn't feel like he himself is enlarged. Instead, through a characteristic psychological substitution, we feel as if we've come closer to him, and the size of the image seems bigger because we've decreased the distance. If the whole picture is enlarged so much that the characters appear much larger than normal, psychological inhibition tricks us into believing we're much closer to the screen than we really are. Thus, we instinctively maintain the impression of normal appearances. But this illusion can easily be broken, greatly diminishing the aesthetic effect. In large movie theaters, where the projector is often far from the screen, characters can appear three or four times larger than actual people. Even so, the illusion remains intact as long as the viewer doesn't notice anything nearby the screen. But if their eye catches sight of a woman playing the piano right below the picture, the illusion is shattered. Suddenly, they see enormous giants on the screen whose hands are as large as half of the piano player’s body, and the normal reactions that lead to the enjoyment of the performance are lost.

The further we go into details, the more we might add such special psychological demands which result from the fundamental principles of the new art. But it would be misleading if we were also to raise demands concerning a point which has often played the chief rôle in the discussion, namely, the selection of suitable topics. Writers who have the unlimited possibilities of trick pictures and film illusions in mind have proclaimed that the fairy tale with its magic wonders ought to be its chief domain, as no theater stage could enter into rivalry. How many have enjoyed "Neptune's Daughter"—the mermaids in the surf and the sudden change of the witch into the octopus on the shore and the joyful play of the watersprites! How many have been bewitched by Princess Nicotina when she trips from the little cigar box along the table! No theater could dare to imitate such raptures of imagination. Other writers have insisted on the superb chances for gorgeous processions and the surging splendor of multitudes. We see thousands in Sherman's march to the sea. How hopeless would be any attempt to imitate it on the stage! When the toreador fights the bull and the crowds in the Spanish arena enter into enthusiastic frenzy, who would compare it with those painted people in the arena when the opera "Carmen" is sung. Again others emphasize the opportunity for historical plays or especially for plays with unusual scenic setting where the beauties of the tropics or of the mountains, of the ocean or of the jungle, are brought into living contact with the spectator. Biblical dramas with pictures of real Palestine, classical plots with real Greece or Rome as a background, have stirred millions all over the globe. Yet the majority of authors claim that the true field for the photoplay is the practical life which surrounds us, as no artistic means of literature or drama can render the details of life with such convincing sincerity and with such realistic power. These are the slums, not seen through the spectacles of a littérateur or the fancy of an outsider but in their whole abhorrent nakedness. These are the dark corners of the metropolis where crime is hidden and where vice is growing rankly.

The more we dive into the details, the more we might mention the unique psychological demands that arise from the fundamental principles of the new art. However, it would be misleading to raise demands about a point that has often been central to the discussion—namely, the choice of suitable topics. Writers who have the limitless possibilities of trick photography and film illusions in mind have argued that fairy tales, with all their magical wonders, should be the primary focus, as no theater stage could compete. How many have enjoyed "Neptune's Daughter"—the mermaids in the waves, the sudden transformation of the witch into an octopus on the shore, and the joyful play of the water sprites! How many have been enchanted by Princess Nicotina as she dances from the little cigar box down the table! No theater could hope to replicate such flights of imagination. Other writers have highlighted the stunning potential for grand processions and the overwhelming beauty of large crowds. We witness thousands during Sherman's march to the sea. What a futile attempt it would be to recreate that on stage! When the toreador faces the bull and the audience in the Spanish arena erupts into enthusiastic frenzy, who would compare it to the painted figures in the arena during the opera "Carmen"? Some emphasize the chance for historical plays or especially for productions with unique scenic settings, where the beauty of the tropics, mountains, ocean, or jungle is brought into direct contact with the audience. Biblical dramas featuring real depictions of Palestine, and classical stories set against the backdrop of real Greece or Rome, have captivated millions globally. Yet the majority of writers argue that the true arena for film is in the everyday life that surrounds us, as no artistic means of literature or drama can convey the details of life with such persuasive sincerity and realism. These are the slums, not viewed through the lens of a literary figure or the imagination of an outsider, but in their stark, unsettling reality. These are the dark corners of the city where crime hides and vice flourishes.

They all are right; and at the same time they all are wrong when they praise one at the expense of another. Realistic and idealistic, practical and romantic, historical and modern topics are fit material for the art of the photoplay. Its world is as unlimited as that of literature, and the same is true of the style of treatment. The humorous, if it is true humor, the tragic, if it is true tragedy, the gay and the solemn, the merry and the pathetic, the half-reel and the five-reel play, all can fulfill the demands of the new art.

They are all right, and at the same time, they are all wrong when they praise one thing at the expense of another. Realistic and idealistic, practical and romantic, historical and modern topics are perfect material for the art of film. Its world is as limitless as that of literature, and the same goes for the style of treatment. The humorous, if it’s genuine humor, the tragic, if it’s true tragedy, the lighthearted and the serious, the joyful and the sad, the short film and the feature-length film, all can meet the demands of this new art.


CHAPTER XI

THE FUNCTION OF THE PHOTOPLAY

Enthusiasts claim that in the United States ten million people daily are attending picture houses. Sceptics believe that "only" two or three millions form the daily attendance. But in any case "the movies" have become the most popular entertainment of the country, nay, of the world, and their influence is one of the strongest social energies of our time. Signs indicate that this popularity and this influence are increasing from day to day. What are the causes, and what are the effects of this movement which was undreamed of only a short time ago?

Enthusiasts say that in the United States, ten million people go to movie theaters every day. Skeptics think that "only" two or three million make up the daily crowd. But either way, "the movies" have become the most popular form of entertainment in the country, and even in the world, and their impact is one of the strongest social forces of our time. Signs show that this popularity and influence are growing every day. What are the reasons behind this movement that was unimaginable just a short while ago, and what effects is it having?

The economists are certainly right when they see the chief reason for this crowding of picture houses in the low price of admission. For five or ten cents long hours of thrilling entertainment in the best seats of the house: this is the magnet which must be more powerful than any theater or concert. Yet the rush to the moving pictures is steadily increasing, while the prices climb up. The dime became a quarter, and in the last two seasons ambitious plays were given before audiences who paid the full theater rates. The character of the audiences, too, suggests that inexpensiveness alone cannot be decisive. Six years ago a keen sociological observer characterized the patrons of the picture palaces as "the lower middle class and the massive public, youths and shopgirls between adolescence and maturity, small dealers, pedlars, laborers, charwomen, besides the small quota of children." This would be hardly a correct description today. This "lower middle class" has long been joined by the upper middle class. To be sure, our observer of that long forgotten past added meekly: "Then there emerges a superior person or two like yourself attracted by mere curiosity and kept in his seat by interest until the very end of the performance; this type sneers aloud to proclaim its superiority and preserve its self-respect, but it never leaves the theater until it must." Today you and I are seen there quite often, and we find that our friends have been there, that they have given up the sneering pose and talk about the new photoplay as a matter of course.

The economists are definitely right when they point out that the main reason for the popularity of movie theaters is the low ticket prices. For just five or ten cents, you can enjoy long hours of exciting entertainment in the best seats of the house: it's a draw that’s probably more appealing than any theater or concert. Yet, the influx to movie theaters is consistently rising, even as prices go up. The dime has turned into a quarter, and in the last two seasons, ambitious plays have been performed for audiences who paid full theater prices. The composition of the audiences also indicates that low cost alone isn’t the only factor. Six years ago, a sharp sociological observer described the patrons of movie palaces as "the lower middle class and the large public, youths and shopgirls between adolescence and adulthood, small business owners, street vendors, laborers, housekeepers, along with a small number of children." This would hardly be an accurate description today. This "lower middle class" has long since been joined by the upper middle class. Of course, our observer from that distant past added sheepishly: "Then there appears a few superior individuals like yourself, drawn in by mere curiosity and held in their seats by interest until the very end of the show; this type often sneers loudly to assert their superiority and maintain their self-respect, but they never leave the theater until they absolutely have to." Nowadays, you and I are seen there quite often, and we’ve discovered that our friends have been attending as well, abandoning that sneering attitude and discussing new films as if it's completely normal.

Above all, even those who are drawn by the cheapness of the performance would hardly push their dimes under the little window so often if they did not really enjoy the plays and were not stirred by a pleasure which holds them for hours. After all, it must be the content of the performances which is decisive of the incomparable triumph. We have no right to conclude from this that only the merits and excellences are the true causes of their success. A caustic critic would probably suggest that just the opposite traits are responsible. He would say that the average American is a mixture of business, ragtime, and sentimentality. He satisfies his business instinct by getting so much for his nickel, he enjoys his ragtime in the slapstick humor, and gratifies his sentimentality with the preposterous melodramas which fill the program. This is quite true, and yet it is not true at all. Success has crowned every effort to improve the photostage; the better the plays are the more the audience approves them. The most ambitious companies are the most flourishing ones. There must be inner values which make the photoplay so extremely attractive and even fascinating.

Above all, even those who are drawn by the low ticket prices wouldn't keep putting their coins in the little window so often if they didn't actually enjoy the shows and weren't captivated by a pleasure that holds their attention for hours. Ultimately, it must be the content of the performances that plays a crucial role in their incredible success. We can’t conclude that only the quality and excellence are the true reasons for their popularity. A sharp critic might argue that it’s the opposite qualities that are responsible. He would say that the typical American is a mix of business, catchy tunes, and sentimentality. He satisfies his business instinct by getting his money’s worth, enjoys the humor in the slapstick comedy, and indulges his sentimentality with the absurd melodramas that fill the program. This is quite true, yet it’s not completely accurate. Success has rewarded every effort to improve the films; the better the plays are, the more the audience appreciates them. The most ambitious companies are also the most successful ones. There must be deeper qualities that make the films so extremely appealing and even captivating.

To a certain degree the mere technical cleverness of the pictures even today holds the interest spellbound as in those early days when nothing but this technical skill could claim the attention. We are still startled by every original effect, even if the mere showing of movement has today lost its impressiveness. Moreover we are captivated by the undeniable beauty of many settings. The melodrama may be cheap; yet it does not disturb the cultured mind as grossly as a similar tragic vulgarity would on the real stage, because it may have the snowfields of Alaska or the palm trees of Florida as radiant background. An intellectual interest, too, finds its satisfaction. We get an insight into spheres which were strange to us. Where outlying regions of human interest are shown on the theater stage, we must usually be satisfied with some standardized suggestion. Here in the moving pictures the play may really bring us to mills and factories, to farms and mines, to courtrooms and hospitals, to castles and palaces in any land on earth.

To some extent, the sheer technical skill of the visuals still captivates us today, just like it did in the early days when only this technical prowess could grab our attention. We’re still impressed by every unique effect, even though simply showing movement isn’t as striking as it once was. Plus, we’re drawn in by the undeniable beauty of many scenes. The melodrama might be lowbrow, but it doesn't offend the refined mind as much as the same kind of cheap tragedy would on a real stage because it can feature the snowy landscapes of Alaska or the lush palm trees of Florida as stunning backdrops. There's also a satisfying intellectual component. We gain insights into areas that were once unfamiliar to us. On a theater stage, representations of distant human interests often fall flat with standard clichés. But in films, we can genuinely be taken to factories and mills, farms and mines, courtrooms and hospitals, castles and palaces anywhere in the world.

Yet a stronger power of the photoplay probably lies in its own dramatic qualities. The rhythm of the play is marked by unnatural rapidity. As the words are absent which, in the drama as in life, fill the gaps between the actions, the gestures and deeds themselves can follow one another much more quickly. Happenings which would fill an hour on the stage can hardly fill more than twenty minutes on the screen. This heightens the feeling of vitality in the spectator. He feels as if he were passing through life with a sharper accent which stirs his personal energies. The usual make-up of the photoplay must strengthen this effect inasmuch as the wordlessness of the picture drama favors a certain simplification of the social conflicts. The subtler shades of the motives naturally demand speech. The later plays of Ibsen could hardly be transformed into photoplays. Where words are missing the characters tend to become stereotyped and the motives to be deprived of their complexity. The plot of the photoplay is usually based on the fundamental emotions which are common to all and which are understood by everybody. Love and hate, gratitude and envy, hope and fear, pity and jealousy, repentance and sinfulness, and all the similar crude emotions have been sufficient for the construction of most scenarios. The more mature development of the photoplay will certainly overcome this primitive character, as, while such an effort to reduce human life to simple instincts is very convenient for the photoplay, it is not at all necessary. In any case where this tendency prevails it must help greatly to excite and to intensify the personal feeling of life and to stir the depths of the human mind.

Yet a stronger aspect of movies probably lies in their own dramatic qualities. The rhythm of the film is marked by an unnatural speed. Since dialogue is absent, which fills the gaps between actions in both drama and life, the gestures and actions can occur much more quickly. Events that might take an hour on stage can hardly take more than twenty minutes on screen. This enhances the sense of vitality in the viewer. They feel as if they are experiencing life with a sharper intensity that energizes them. The typical makeup of movies must amplify this effect, as the lack of words in visual storytelling encourages a simplification of social conflicts. The subtler nuances of motives naturally require dialogue. Ibsen's later plays could hardly be adapted into films. When words are missing, characters tend to become stereotypes, and the motives lose their complexity. The plot of a film usually revolves around basic emotions that are common to everyone and easily understood. Love and hate, gratitude and envy, hope and fear, pity and jealousy, repentance and wrongdoing, along with other similar raw emotions, have been sufficient for the development of most scripts. The more advanced evolution of film will certainly move beyond this simplistic nature, as while it's convenient to reduce human life to simple instincts for movies, it's not necessary at all. In any case where this tendency prevails, it must significantly help to stimulate and intensify the personal experience of life and to reach deep into the human psyche.

But the richest source of the unique satisfaction in the photoplay is probably that esthetic feeling which is significant for the new art and which we have understood from its psychological conditions. The massive outer world has lost its weight, it has been freed from space, time, and causality, and it has been clothed in the forms of our own consciousness. The mind has triumphed over matter and the pictures roll on with the ease of musical tones. It is a superb enjoyment which no other art can furnish us. No wonder that temples for the new goddess are built in every little hamlet.

But the biggest source of unique satisfaction in movies is likely that aesthetic feeling that defines this new art form and which we’ve understood through its psychological aspects. The massive outer world has lost its weight, it's been freed from space, time, and causality, and it’s been shaped by our own consciousness. The mind has overcome matter and the images flow by as easily as musical notes. It’s a fantastic pleasure that no other art can provide. No surprise that new temples for this modern goddess are being built in every small town.

The intensity with which the plays take hold of the audience cannot remain without strong social effects. It has even been reported that sensory hallucinations and illusions have crept in; neurasthenic persons are especially inclined to experience touch or temperature or smell or sound impressions from what they see on the screen. The associations become as vivid as realities, because the mind is so completely given up to the moving pictures. The applause into which the audiences, especially of rural communities, break out at a happy turn of the melodramatic pictures is another symptom of the strange fascination. But it is evident that such a penetrating influence must be fraught with dangers. The more vividly the impressions force themselves on the mind, the more easily must they become starting points for imitation and other motor responses. The sight of crime and of vice may force itself on the consciousness with disastrous results. The normal resistance breaks down and the moral balance, which would have been kept under the habitual stimuli of the narrow routine life, may be lost under the pressure of the realistic suggestions. At the same time the subtle sensitiveness of the young mind may suffer from the rude contrasts between the farces and the passionate romances which follow with benumbing speed in the darkened house. The possibilities of psychical infection and destruction cannot be overlooked.

The way the plays grab the audience's attention can lead to significant social effects. There have even been reports of sensory hallucinations and illusions occurring; people with nervous conditions are especially likely to feel sensations of touch, temperature, smell, or sound based on what they see on the screen. The connections become as real as actual experiences because the mind is so absorbed in the moving images. The applause that audiences, particularly in rural areas, erupt into during a happy moment in a melodramatic film is another sign of this strange allure. However, it’s clear that such an overwhelming influence can be dangerous. The more vividly the impressions force their way into consciousness, the easier it is for them to inspire imitation and other reactions. The depiction of crime and immorality can intrude on awareness with harmful consequences. Normal resistance can weaken, and the moral balance that would typically be maintained in daily life might be lost under the strain of realistic suggestions. At the same time, the young mind's delicate sensitivity could be harmed by the harsh contrasts between the comedies and intense dramas that follow each other at a fast pace in the dark theater. The potential for psychological influence and harm should not be ignored.

Those may have been exceptional cases only when grave crimes have been traced directly back to the impulses from unwholesome photoplays, but no psychologist can determine exactly how much the general spirit of righteousness, of honesty, of sexual cleanliness and modesty, may be weakened by the unbridled influence of plays of low moral standard. All countries seem to have been awakened to this social danger. The time when unsavory French comedies poisoned youth lies behind us. A strong reaction has set in and the leading companies among the photoplay producers fight everywhere in the first rank for suppression of the unclean. Some companies even welcome censorship provided that it is high-minded and liberal and does not confuse artistic freedom with moral licentiousness. Most, to be sure, seem doubtful whether the new movement toward Federal censorship is in harmony with American ideas on the freedom of public expression.

Those might have been rare cases where serious crimes were directly linked to the influence of inappropriate movies, but no psychologist can accurately measure how much the overall sense of justice, honesty, sexual purity, and modesty can be undermined by the unchecked impact of films with low moral standards. It seems that countries everywhere have become aware of this social threat. The days when distasteful French comedies negatively affected youth are behind us. A strong backlash has begun, and the top companies in the film industry are actively working to eliminate inappropriate content. Some companies even support censorship as long as it is principled and open-minded, not equating artistic freedom with moral irresponsibility. However, many still seem unsure if the new push for federal censorship aligns with American values regarding the freedom of public expression.

But while the sources of danger cannot be overlooked, the social reformer ought to focus his interest still more on the tremendous influences for good which may be exerted by the moving pictures. The fact that millions are daily under the spell of the performances on the screen is established. The high degree of their suggestibility during those hours in the dark house may be taken for granted. Hence any wholesome influence emanating from the photoplay must have an incomparable power for the remolding and upbuilding of the national soul. From this point of view the boundary lines between the photoplay and the merely instructive moving pictures with the news of the day or the magazine articles on the screen become effaced. The intellectual, the moral, the social, and the esthetic culture of the community may be served by all of them. Leading educators have joined in endorsing the foundation of a Universal Culture Lyceum. The plan is to make and circulate moving pictures for the education of the youth of the land, picture studies in science, history, religion, literature, geography, biography, art, architecture, social science, economics and industry. From this Lyceum "schools, churches and colleges will be furnished with motion pictures giving the latest results and activities in every sphere capable of being pictured."

But while we can't ignore the sources of danger, social reformers should focus even more on the amazing positive influence that movies can have. It's a fact that millions of people are captivated by what's on the screen every day. We can take for granted how suggestible they are during those hours in the dark theater. Therefore, any positive influence that comes from films has incredible potential to reshape and uplift the national spirit. From this perspective, the lines between traditional films and purely educational moving pictures that show news or magazine topics blur. All of them can contribute to the intellectual, moral, social, and aesthetic development of the community. Leading educators have come together to support the establishment of a Universal Culture Lyceum. The goal is to create and distribute films that educate the youth of our country, covering subjects like science, history, religion, literature, geography, biography, art, architecture, social science, economics, and industry. This Lyceum will supply schools, churches, and colleges with films that showcase the latest findings and activities in all areas that can be visualized.

But, however much may be achieved by such conscious efforts toward education, the far larger contribution must be made by the regular picture houses which the public seeks without being conscious of the educational significance. The teaching of the moving pictures must not be forced on a more or less indifferent audience, but ought to be absorbed by those who seek entertainment and enjoyment from the films and are ready to make their little economic sacrifice.

But no matter how much can be accomplished through these intentional efforts in education, the much bigger contribution has to come from the regular movie theaters that the public visits without realizing their educational value. The lessons from films shouldn’t be imposed on an indifferent audience; instead, they should be absorbed by those looking for entertainment and enjoyment from the movies, who are also willing to make a small economic sacrifice.

The purely intellectual part of this uplift is the easiest. Not only the news pictures and the scientific demonstrations but also the photoplays can lead young and old to ever new regions of knowledge. The curiosity and the imagination of the spectators will follow gladly. Yet even in the intellectual sphere the dangers must not be overlooked. They are not positive. It is not as in the moral sphere where the healthy moral impulse is checked by the sight of crimes which stir up antisocial desires. The danger is not that the pictures open insight into facts which ought not to be known. It is not the dangerous knowledge which must be avoided, but it is the trivializing influence of a steady contact with things which are not worth knowing. The larger part of the film literature of today is certainly harmful in this sense. The intellectual background of most photoplays is insipid. By telling the plot without the subtle motivation which the spoken word of the drama may bring, not only do the characters lose color but all the scenes and situations are simplified to a degree which adjusts them to a thoughtless public and soon becomes intolerable to an intellectually trained spectator.

The purely intellectual aspect of this uplift is the easiest. Not only the news clips and scientific demonstrations, but also the films can lead both young and old to new areas of knowledge. The curiosity and imagination of the audience will eagerly follow. However, even in the intellectual realm, we must not overlook the dangers. They aren’t direct. It’s not like in the moral sphere, where a healthy moral impulse is undermined by witnessing crimes that provoke antisocial desires. The danger isn't that these images reveal truths that shouldn't be known. It's not the dangerous knowledge we need to shy away from, but rather the trivializing effect of constant exposure to things that aren't worth knowing. A significant portion of today’s film literature is harmful in this way. The intellectual foundation of most films is bland. By presenting the story without the nuanced motivations that spoken dialogue in drama can provide, not only do the characters become flat, but all the scenes and situations are oversimplified to a level that caters to a mindless audience and soon becomes unbearable for someone with an educated mindset.

They force on the cultivated mind that feeling which musical persons experience in the musical comedies of the day. We hear the melodies constantly with the feeling of having heard them ever so often before. This lack of originality and inspiration is not necessary; it does not lie in the art form. Offenbach and Strauss and others have written musical comedies which are classical. Neither does it lie in the form of the photoplay that the story must be told in that insipid, flat, uninspired fashion. Nor is it necessary in order to reach the millions. To appeal to the intelligence does not mean to presuppose college education. Moreover the differentiation has already begun. Just as the plays of Shaw or Ibsen address a different audience from that reached by the "Old Homestead" or "Ben Hur," we have already photoplays adapted to different types, and there is not the slightest reason to connect with the art of the screen an intellectual flabbiness. It would be no gain for intellectual culture if all the reasoning were confined to the so-called instructive pictures and the photoplays were served without any intellectual salt. On the contrary, the appeal of those strictly educational lessons may be less deep than the producers hope, because the untrained minds, especially of youth and of the uneducated audiences, have considerable difficulty in following the rapid flight of events when they occur in unfamiliar surroundings. The child grasps very little in seeing the happenings in a factory. The psychological and economic lesson may be rather wasted because the power of observation is not sufficiently developed and the assimilation proceeds too slowly. But it is quite different when a human interest stands behind it and connects the events in the photoplay.

They impose on educated minds the feeling that musical people experience in today's musical comedies. We hear the melodies repeatedly, with the sense that we have heard them many times before. This lack of originality and inspiration isn't necessary; it doesn’t stem from the art form itself. Offenbach, Strauss, and others have created musical comedies that are classics. The way of storytelling in films doesn't have to be dull, flat, or uninspired either. It's not a requirement to reach a wide audience. Appealing to intelligence doesn’t mean assuming everyone has a college education. Furthermore, the distinction has already started. Just as Shaw or Ibsen's plays attract a different crowd than "Old Homestead" or "Ben Hur," there are already films tailored for various audiences, and there's no reason to associate the art of cinema with a lack of intellectual rigor. It wouldn't benefit intellectual culture if all reasoning were limited to so-called educational films while movies were presented without any thoughtful depth. In fact, the allure of these strictly educational lessons may not be as strong as the creators expect, since untrained minds, especially those of youth and less educated viewers, struggle to keep up with the fast-paced events in unfamiliar contexts. A child understands very little when witnessing events in a factory. The psychological and economic lessons are likely wasted because the power of observation isn't well-developed, and the absorption of the material is too slow. However, it's a whole different story when a human interest connects the events in the film.

The difficulties in the way of the right moral influence are still greater than in the intellectual field. Certainly it is not enough to have the villain punished in the last few pictures of the reel. If scenes of vice or crime are shown with all their lure and glamour the moral devastation of such a suggestive show is not undone by the appended social reaction. The misguided boys or girls feel sure that they would be successful enough not to be trapped. The mind through a mechanism which has been understood better and better by the psychologists in recent years suppresses the ideas which are contrary to the secret wishes and makes those ideas flourish by which those "subconscious" impulses are fulfilled. It is probably a strong exaggeration when a prominent criminologist recently claimed that "eighty-five per cent. of the juvenile crime which has been investigated has been found traceable either directly or indirectly to motion pictures which have shown on the screen how crimes could be committed." But certainly, as far as these demonstrations have worked havoc, their influence would not have been annihilated by a picturesque court scene in which the burglar is unsuccessful in misleading the jury. The true moral influence must come from the positive spirit of the play itself. Even the photodramatic lessons in temperance and piety will not rebuild a frivolous or corrupt or perverse community. The truly upbuilding play is not a dramatized sermon on morality and religion. There must be a moral wholesomeness in the whole setting, a moral atmosphere which is taken as a matter of course like fresh air and sunlight. An enthusiasm for the noble and uplifting, a belief in duty and discipline of the mind, a faith in ideals and eternal values must permeate the world of the screen. If it does, there is no crime and no heinous deed which the photoplay may not tell with frankness and sincerity. It is not necessary to deny evil and sin in order to strengthen the consciousness of eternal justice.

The challenges to achieving the right moral influence are even more significant than those in the intellectual realm. It's definitely not enough to see the villain get punished in the final scenes. If scenes of vice or crime are depicted with all their allure and glamor, the moral damage caused by such a suggestive display isn't canceled out by the social consequences that follow. Misguided boys and girls are convinced they would be clever enough not to get caught. The mind, through mechanisms that psychologists have come to understand better in recent years, suppresses thoughts that conflict with hidden desires and makes thoughts that fulfill those "subconscious" impulses thrive. It may be a significant exaggeration when a well-known criminologist recently asserted that "eighty-five percent of the juvenile crime that has been investigated can be traced either directly or indirectly to movies that have shown how crimes could be committed." However, it’s clear that, despite the chaos caused by these portrayals, their influence wouldn’t be erased by a dramatic courtroom scene in which the burglar fails to fool the jury. True moral influence must stem from the positive spirit of the narrative itself. Even photodramatic lessons on temperance and piety won’t restore a shallow, corrupt, or twisted community. A truly uplifting play isn't just a dramatized sermon about morality and religion. There needs to be a fundamental moral integrity throughout the entire setting, a moral atmosphere that feels as natural as fresh air and sunlight. An enthusiasm for what’s noble and uplifting, a belief in duty and mental discipline, and a faith in ideals and timeless values must fill the world of the screen. If that happens, there’s no crime or terrible act that a movie can’t portray with honesty and sincerity. It’s not necessary to deny evil and sin to reinforce the awareness of ultimate justice.

But the greatest mission which the photoplay may have in our community is that of esthetic cultivation. No art reaches a larger audience daily, no esthetic influence finds spectators in a more receptive frame of mind. On the other hand no training demands a more persistent and planful arousing of the mind than the esthetic training, and never is progress more difficult than when the teacher adjusts himself to the mere liking of the pupils. The country today would still be without any symphony concerts and operas if it had only received what the audiences believed at the moment that they liked best. The esthetically commonplace will always triumph over the significant unless systematic efforts are made to reënforce the work of true beauty. Communities at first always prefer Sousa to Beethoven. The moving picture audience could only by slow steps be brought from the tasteless and vulgar eccentricities of the first period to the best plays of today, and the best plays of today can be nothing but the beginning of the great upward movement which we hope for in the photoplay. Hardly any teaching can mean more for our community than the teaching of beauty where it reaches the masses. The moral impulse and the desire for knowledge are, after all, deeply implanted in the American crowd, but the longing for beauty is rudimentary; and yet it means harmony, unity, true satisfaction, and happiness in life. The people still has to learn the great difference between true enjoyment and fleeting pleasure, between real beauty and the mere tickling of the senses.

But the biggest role that film can play in our community is in nurturing our appreciation for art. No other medium reaches a larger audience every day, and no artistic influence finds viewers in a more open state of mind. However, no training requires more persistent and thoughtful engagement than artistic education, and progress is often hardest when teachers just cater to students' immediate preferences. If the country had only given people what they thought they liked best at the time, we would still be without symphony concerts and operas. The ordinary and familiar will always overshadow the significant unless there are deliberate efforts to support true beauty. Communities initially prefer Sousa to Beethoven. The audience for moving pictures could only gradually move from the tasteless and silly extremes of the early days to the best plays of today, and those best plays can only be the starting point of the significant progress we hope for in film. Few things can benefit our community more than imparting a sense of beauty that reaches the masses. The moral drive and desire for knowledge are deeply rooted in the American public, but the yearning for beauty is still basic; yet, it represents harmony, unity, true fulfillment, and happiness in life. People still need to learn the crucial difference between genuine enjoyment and fleeting pleasure, between real beauty and mere sensory stimulation.

Of course, there are those, and they may be legion today, who would deride every plan to make the moving pictures the vehicle of esthetic education. How can we teach the spirit of true art by a medium which is in itself the opposite of art? How can we implant the idea of harmony by that which is in itself a parody on art? We hear the contempt for "canned drama" and the machine-made theater. Nobody stops to think whether other arts despise the help of technique. The printed book of lyric poems is also machine-made; the marble bust has also "preserved" for two thousand years the beauty of the living woman who was the model for the Greek sculptor. They tell us that the actor on the stage gives the human beings as they are in reality, but the moving pictures are unreal and therefore of incomparably inferior value. They do not consider that the roses of the summer which we enjoy in the stanzas of the poet do not exist in reality in the forms of iambic verse and of rhymes; they live in color and odor, but their color and odor fade away, while the roses in the stanzas live on forever. They fancy that the value of an art depends upon its nearness to the reality of physical nature.

Of course, there are people, and they might be many today, who dismiss any idea of using movies as a means of artistic education. How can we teach the essence of true art through a medium that is fundamentally the opposite of art? How can we instill the concept of harmony with something that is essentially a mockery of art? We hear disdain for “canned drama” and manufactured theater. Nobody considers whether other art forms reject the influence of technique. The printed book of poetry is also machine-made; the marble bust has also “preserved” for two thousand years the beauty of the living woman who was the model for the Greek sculptor. They claim that actors on stage present human beings as they truly are, while movies are artificial and thus vastly inferior. They fail to recognize that the roses of the summer which we appreciate in the lines of a poem do not exist in reality in the forms of iambic verse and rhymes; they exist in color and scent, but their color and scent fade away, while the roses in the verses live on forever. They believe that the worth of an art form is based on how close it is to the reality of physical nature.

It has been the chief task of our whole discussion to prove the shallowness of such arguments and objections. We recognized that art is a way to overcome nature and to create out of the chaotic material of the world something entirely new, entirely unreal, which embodies perfect unity and harmony. The different arts are different ways of abstracting from reality; and when we began to analyze the psychology of the moving pictures we soon became aware that the photoplay has a way to perform this task of art with entire originality, independent of the art of the theater, as much as poetry is independent of music or sculpture of painting. It is an art in itself. Only the future can teach us whether it will become a great art, whether a Leonardo, a Shakespeare, a Mozart, will ever be born for it. Nobody can foresee the directions which the new art may take. Mere esthetic insight into the principles can never foreshadow the development in the unfolding of civilization. Who would have been bold enough four centuries ago to foresee the musical means and effects of the modern orchestra? Just the history of music shows how the inventive genius has always had to blaze the path in which the routine work of the art followed. Tone combinations which appeared intolerable dissonances to one generation were again and again assimilated and welcomed and finally accepted as a matter of course by later times. Nobody can foresee the ways which the new art of the photoplay will open, but everybody ought to recognize even today that it is worth while to help this advance and to make the art of the film a medium for an original creative expression of our time and to mold by it the esthetic instincts of the millions. Yes, it is a new art—and this is why it has such fascination for the psychologist who in a world of ready-made arts, each with a history of many centuries, suddenly finds a new form still undeveloped and hardly understood. For the first time the psychologist can observe the starting of an entirely new esthetic development, a new form of true beauty in the turmoil of a technical age, created by its very technique and yet more than any other art destined to overcome outer nature by the free and joyful play of the mind.

It has been the main focus of our entire discussion to prove how shallow those arguments and objections are. We understand that art is a way to transcend nature and transform the chaotic elements of the world into something totally new and unreal, which embodies perfect unity and harmony. Different forms of art are various approaches to abstracting from reality; and when we started to analyze the psychology of moving images, we quickly realized that film manages to achieve this artistic task with complete originality, standing apart from theatrical art, just as poetry is separate from music or sculpture from painting. It is an art form in its own right. Only time will reveal whether it becomes a significant art, whether a Leonardo, Shakespeare, or Mozart will ever emerge in this domain. No one can predict the directions that this new art may explore. Simply having aesthetic insight into its principles cannot foretell its development as civilization unfolds. Who would have been daring enough four centuries ago to envision the musical capabilities and effects of the modern orchestra? The history of music reveals that inventive genius has always had to forge the path for routine artistic efforts to follow. Combinations of tones that seemed intolerable dissonances to one generation were repeatedly embraced and ultimately accepted as normal by later generations. No one can predict the pathways that the new art of film will open, but everyone should recognize even now that it is worthwhile to support this progress and to establish the art of film as a medium for original creative expression of our time, shaping the aesthetic instincts of the masses. Yes, it is a new art—and this is why it captivates psychologists who, in a world of established arts each with centuries of history, suddenly encounter a fresh form that is still developing and not fully understood. For the first time, psychologists can observe the emergence of a completely new aesthetic movement, a new form of true beauty in the chaos of a technical age, shaped by its very technology and yet, more than any other art, poised to conquer external nature through the free and joyful play of the mind.


BOOKS BY HUGO MÜNSTERBERG

  • Psychology and Life pp. 286, Boston, 1899
  • Grundzüge der Psychologie pp. 565, Leipzig, 1900
  • American Traits pp. 235, Boston, 1902
  • Die Amerikaner pp. 502 and 349, Berlin, 1904 (Rev, 1912)
  • Principles of Art Education pp. 118, New York, 1905
  • The Eternal Life pp. 72, Boston, 1905
  • Science and Idealism pp. 71, Boston, 1906
  • Philosophie der Werte pp. 486, Leipzig, 1907
  • On the Witness Stand pp. 269, New York, 1908
  • Aus Deutsch-Amerika pp. 245, Berlin, 1909
  • The Eternal Values pp. 436, Boston, 1909
  • Psychotherapy pp. 401, New York, 1909
  • Psychology and the Teacher pp. 330, New York, 1910
  • American Problems pp. 222, New York, 1910
  • Psychologie und Wirtschaftsleben pp. 192, Leipzig, 1912
  • Vocation and Learning pp. 289, St. Louis, 1912
  • Psychology and Industrial Efficiency pp. 321, Boston, 1913
  • American Patriotism pp. 262, New York, 1913
  • Grundzüge der Psychotechnik pp. 767, Leipzig, 1914
  • Psychology and Social Sanity pp. 320, New York, 1914
  • Psychology, General and Applied pp. 488, New York, 1914
  • The War and America pp. 210, New York, 1914
  • The Peace and America pp. 276, New York, 1915
  • The Photoplay New York, 1916

Download ePUB

If you like this ebook, consider a donation!